M32 Operating Manual

OPERATING MANUAL
for
MAZATROL M-32
MANUAL No.: H731SA0576E
Serial No.:
NC equipment:
PRECAUTIONS
f Before operating this machine, please read this manual with care and fully understand the contents of the manual so that
the machine can exert its performance safely.

f Although the contents of this manual are closely checked for perfection, if there is any ambivalent point, incorrect
description, or omission, contact us, please.

f In order to explain the details, all the illustrations contained in this manual do not necessarily show the covers, doors,
safety guards, or shields. Therefore, be sure to restore all the specified covers, shields, etc., and observe the contents
of the manual when operating this machine. If this precaution is ignored, a serious accident may incur, resulting in
damage to the important units of the machine and other accessories.
f This manual is subject to modifications and changes as required for the improvement in, and the change in the
specification of, the machine and the CNC equipment, as well as for usability of the manual itself. The modifications and
changes are indicated by updating the manual numbers in a revised version.
f When your manual is damaged or lost, and a new material is needed, inform us of the manual number.
If the manual number is not identified, inform us of the following:
1. Name of the machine 2. Number of the machine 3. Name of the manual

Contact the Techincal Center (TC) or the Service Center (SC) of Yamazaki Mazak for operations of this machine and
replacement of the manual.
Issue of the manual : Manual Editional Section of Engineering Generalization Section,
Yamazaki Mazak Co., Ltd.
01. 1995
Return to Main Menu
Notes:
PREFACE
This manual offers a general description of MAZATROL M-32 (hereinafter referred
to as the NC equipment developed for the machining center). Detailed description
of each individual machining center is given in the Operating manual accompanying
the relevant machine. Descriptions in the machine operating manuals govern that
given in this manual.
This manual describes both the standard functions and options of the NC
equipment. The relevant machine operation manual should be used to check
whether or not the particular function of the NC equipment is an option.
This manual contains operational restrictions and prohibitions/inhibitions as many as
possible. However, since all such items cannot be actually covered in the manual,
items that are not clearly described as permitted should be read to mean nonpermitted.
- Documents that accompany the product
Standard
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Operating manual for machine

Maintenance manual for machine
Operating manual for MAZATROL M-32 (This manual)
Programming manual for MAZATROL M-32 Application
Basic operating manual for MAZATROL M-32
Parameter list M-32
7. Alarm list M-32

Option
1. Programming manual for MAZATROL M-32 EIA/ISO
2. Programming manual for 3-D processing
3. Programming manual for five-surface machining
4. CPU-LINK communication software preparation procedure
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Operating manual for MAZATROL CAM32-A system

Operating manual for MAZATROL editor
Operating manual for Multi-Plane machining programs
Programming manual for MAZATROL M-32 Multi-Plane machining
Programming manual for MAZATROL M-32 Multi-Plane machining (EIA/ISO)
Operating manual for HDLC
11. Operating manual for Geometry compensation function

12. Operating manual for High-speed machining mode feature
Notes:
1. Transcription, reproduction or alteration of part or all of this document without
the prior written permission of the publisher is prohibited.
2. The contents of this document are subject to change without prior notice.
3. Ambiguities or errors, if any, in this document should be communicated to
your YAMAZAKI MAZAK products service station.
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
Safety Precautions
This NC equipment is provided with various safety interlocks to protect men and
machinery from unexpected accidents and machine failures. Those who are to
operate the NC equipment, however, should strictly observe the following precautions without relying completely on such safety interlocks:
1. Carefully read the operating manuals and the programming manual to obtain a
through understanding of the functions of the NC equipment, and to operate
the equipment correctly.
2. After turning on the power switch on the operating panel, do not carry out any
other operations before the l READY (ready for operation) lamp comes on.
3. Immediately turn off the main circuit breaker in the event of a power failure.
4. Before actuating a key or switch on the operating panel, be sure to make a
visual check to ensure that the key or switch is the correct one.
5. Do not touch any keys or switches with wet hands or with gloves being worn.
6. Before changing a parameter, make sure of its type and value.
7. Parameters are one of the most important factors in providing proper control of
the machines. A machine malfunction may result from tampering with a
parameter setting key or switch.
To Ensure Smooth Operation
Always keep the following in mind to ensure smooth operation.
1. Before connecting or disconnecting the transmission cable of the terminal
equipment for data I/O to or from the NC equipment, be sure to unplug the
power cable of the terminal equipment from the receptable.
2. If the power of the NC equipment is remained off for over about two months, or
if it no longer becomes possible for the battery to back up the power because
of the expiry of the battery life, erroneous operations, or other contingencies,
stored data such as programs, parameters, etc. may be erased. You should
therefore save the entire necessary machining program data, tool data, and
parameter data into external output units. Also, beware that in the following
cases, it becomes necessary to reload data such as machining program data:
(1) If battery alarms occur
(2) If the CPU card is replaced
(3) If the memory card containing the machining programs is replaced

See section 4-9 DATA IN/OUT Display for data saving procedures.
Note:
The contents of the memory must be deleted to expand the machining
program data capacity. Reloading of the machining program data and other
data is also required in that case.
3. - If the NC power is to be left turned off for a long period, remove the lead
storage battery (or disconnect the recharger from the load) and store the
battery or recharger in a cold, dry place. They do not need be stored into a
refrigerator, however.
- During the storage period, recharge the battery at least once every six
months.
- Beware that the battery deteriorates even during the storage period.
- If the storage battery is to be stored for an extended period, fully recharge the
battery and store it in a dry, cold place (temperatures from 20 to +40
degrees C).
(4E)
CONTENTS
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
1
3
1.
OPERATING PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-3-1
1-3-2
Layout of Keys, Pushbuttons, Switches, and Indicator Lamps on

the Operating Panel
..............................
Functions of Keys, Pushbuttons, and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine status indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch-sensor indicator lamps (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-8
1-17
1-17
1-18E
2.
2-1
2-2
2-3
DISPLAY DATA AND SCREEN OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Name of the Components of Each Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure for Calling up a Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-1
2-4
2-6
3.
PROCEDURES FOR DATA INPUT, CANCELLATION,
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
AND CHANGE
.................................
Setting Numeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Menu Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2E
3-2E
4.
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-4-1
4-4-2
DESCRIPTION OF EACH DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POSITION Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMMAND Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACE Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WK. PROGRAM Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PATH CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROGRAM FILE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-2
4-5
4-8
4-14
4-15
4-20
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-5
4-6
4-6-1
SHAPE CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLANE CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOL FILE Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOL DATA Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool data GROUP NO. ASSIGNMENT (Option)
..........
4-26
4-29
4-31
4-34
4-42
4-60
4-6-2
4-7
4-8
Tool data INVALIDATION (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TOOL LAYOUT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETER Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-67
4-72
4-85
H731SA0576E
C-1
4-9
4-9-1
4-9-2
4-9-3
4-10
4-10-1
4-10-2
DATA IN/OUT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIA/ISO INFOR Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOL OFFSET DATA display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WORK OFFSET DATA display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-87
4-89
4-98
4-102
4-112
4-113
4-118
4-10-3
4-10-4
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-13-1
MACRO VARIABLE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TOOL LIFE INDEX display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODAL INFO. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCESS WORK Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-122
4-126
4-136
4-138
4-138
4-142
4-14
4-14-1
4-14-2
4-14-3
4-14-4
4-14-5
4-14-6
Machining Management Functions (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Function overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled-operation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External unit skipping function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External multi-piece machining function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jig offsetting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-143
4-144
4-145
4-152
4-154
4-157
4-160
4-14-7
4-15
4-15-1
4-15-2
4-15-3
4-15-4
Machining management data writing macro-program . . . . . . . . 4-160

EIA Program Monitoring Functions (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-166
4-166
PROGRAM MONITOR display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-168
Description of the monitoring function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-170
Program start position designation function . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-172-2
4-15-5
4-16
4-16-1
4-16-2
4-16-3
4-16-4
4-16-5
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-172-4
Added Fundamental Coordinates Function (Option) . . . . . . . . 4-173
4-173
ADDITIONAL WPC display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-173
Address setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-174
Considerations to measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-175
Operating notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-175
4-17
4-17-1
4-17-2
4-17-3
4-17-4
4-17-5
On-machine Measurement (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Use of on-machine measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASURE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-176
4-176
4-176
4-178
4-181
4-184
4-17-6
4-17-7
4-17-8
4-17-9
4-17-10
4-17-11
Mode and menu changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graph of straightness data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Five-surface machining option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coordinates writing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement results copying function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-187
4-189
4-189
4-191
4-193
4-197
C-2
4-18
4-18-1
4-18-2
4-18-3
4-18-4
4-18-5
4-18-6
Workpiece Measurement Printout System (Option) . . . . . . . . .

System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanations of programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program and measurement pattern chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-198
4-198
4-204
4-206
4-209
4-214
4-237
4-18-7
4-18-8
4-18-9
4-19
4-19-1
4-19-2
Output of measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program and printout example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commercial Printer Connect Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printers Yamazaki Mazak recommends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-239
4-242
4-243
4-248
4-248
4-248
4-19-3
4-19-4
4-19-5
4-20
4-20-1
4-20-2
4-21
Specification of the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explication of the setting parameter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIA COMMAND Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the monitoring function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAZATROL Program DC Input/Output (Option) . . . . . . . . . . .
4-249
4-250
4-250
4-258
4-260
4-261
4-262
4-21-1
4-21-2
4-21-3
4-21-4
4-21-5
4-22
Transfer conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Management Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-262
4-262
4-263
4-263
4-264
4-265
4-22-1
4-22-2
4-22-3
4-22-4
4-23
4-23-1
4-23-2
Prohibition of selected-program editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prohibition of selected-program call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selected-program erasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program-Name Tape Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-265
4-265
4-266
4-267
4-267
4-267
4-267
4-23-3
4-23-4
4-23-5
4-23-6
Operating procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-268
4-268
4-269
4-269
5.
PRINTOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
6.
DATA WRITE INHIBIT CONDITIONS
6-1
C-3
...................
(C-4E)
5. Functions and usage of other menu data

When the TOOL DATA display is called up on the screen, the following menu
will be displayed in the menu display area:
EDIT
TEACH
INCR.
TOOL
PREVIOUS
NEXT
SEARCH
PAGE
PAGE
...
Pressing the menu key EDIT causes the following menu to display.
TOOL
ERASE
TOOL NAME T-DATA

ORDER
MOVE
TOOL
ASSIGN
Of the menu, the TEACH, TOOL ASSIGN, and T-DATA MOVE menu items
have already been described. (See screen operations 2., 3., and 4.,
respectively.)
The functions and usage of the other menu data indicated on the TOOL DATA
display are described below.
In the description given below, it is to be assumed that the TOOL DATA
display is already on the screen and that menu
the menu display area.
is currently being displayed in
(1) INCR.
INCR. (Incremental) can be used only when changing the data that has been
input to the ACT-z or LENGTH item on the TOOL DATA display.
After the menu key INCR. has been pressed, the data that has already been
input can be overridden simply by keying-in the increment (or decrement) that
is appropriate to that data.
[1] Assume that the cursor already remains in a blinking state in the position of the
ACT-z or LENGTH item.
[2] Press the menu key INCR.
- This will cause the display status of INCR. to reverse and the message
LENGTH TO ADD? to present.
[3] Using the numeric keys, specify the increment (or decrement) that corresponds
to the data already input. After that, press the input key
Example:
When the cursor is blinking in the position shown below:
TNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
ACT-z
F-MILL
80.A
80.
LENGTH COMP.
100.
0.
E-MILL
10.A
10.
100.
0.
CTR-DR
20.
100.
0.
DRILL
10.
100.
0.
DRILL
7.
100.
0.
TAP M
8.
8.
100.
0.
4-55
1) To change the ACT-z data of the end-mill from 10 mm (0.39 in) to 10.02
,
mm (0.39 in), first press the menu key INCR. and then press the
,
, and
keys, in that order.
2) To change the ACT-z data of the end-mill from 10 mm (0.39 in) to 9.9
,
mm (0.39 in), first press the menu key INCR. and then press the
,
, and
keys in this order.
- The results of the addition (or subtraction) will then be displayed.

- In addition, the reverse-display status of INCR. will be released
automatically.
Note:
INCR. is quite useful for correcting tool data if a work has been overcut or
undercut during a machining operation.
(2) TOOL SEARCH
This menu item should be used to search for a tool name that is registered on
the TOOL DATA display.
[1] Press the menu key TOOL SEARCH.
- This will cause the message TOOL NAME TO SEARCH <INPUT>? to
display and, in the menu display area, the following menu to present:
ENDMILL FACEMILL
CHAMF
BALL
OTHER
TOUCH
CUTTER
ENDMILL
TOOL
SENSOR
...
- By pressing the menu key , it becomes possible to change the above

menu over to the following menu:
CENTER
DRILL
DRILL
BACK SPOT REAMER

FACER
TAP
BORING BACK BOR.

BAR
CHIP
BAR
VACUUM
...
[2] From among menus and , select the menu item that corresponds to the
tool name to be searched for, and press the appropriate menu key.
- This will cause the display status of the selected menu to reverse and the
message NOMINAL DIAMETER OF TOOL? to present.
[3] Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the nominal diameter value of the
tool name to be searched for. Then, press the input key
- If the tool name to be searched for is already registered, the cursor will
appear in the position of the TOOL item of that tool name.
4-56
Example:
When checking the pocket number under which a drill with a nominal diameter
of 10 mm (0.39 in) is registered:
After pressing the menu key DRILL in procedural step [2], press the
, and
keys in this order in procedural step [3].
This will cause the cursor to appear in the position shown below.
TNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
ACT-z
F-MILL
80.A
80.
LENGTH COMP.
0.
E-MILL
10.A
10.
0.
CTR-DR
20.
0.
D RILL
10.
0.
DRILL
7.
0.
TAP M
8.
8.
0.
This shows that the tool name to be searched for is registered under pocket
number 4.
[4] If the input key
is pressed following this, the NC equipment will check
whether the corresponding tool name exists in subsequent lines to that in which
the cursor is blinking.
- If the corresponding tool name exists, the cursor will move to the TOOL item
of that tool.
- If the corresponding tool name does not exist, the alarm message 407
RELEVANT DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed.
Note:
It is also possible to search for the corresponding tool name just by specifying
TOOL item. In this case, press only the input key
in procedural step [3]
without specifying the nominal diameter.

(3) PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE
On the TOOL DATA display, only up to 16 sets of tool data can be indicated
per page. The seventeenth and subsequent sets of tool data are indicated on
the second and subsequent pages of the display.
Pressing the menu key NEXT PAGE causes the next page of the TOOL DATA
display to present.
Pressing the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE causes the immediately previous
page of the TOOL DATA display to present.
(4) TOOL ERASE
Use this menu item to erase tool data registered on the TOOL DATA display.
4-57
[1] Press and hold down the key
or
until the cursor has moved to the
tool data you want to erase.

Example:
On the display shown below, if the E-MILL data of tool number 2 is to be
erased:
TNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
ACT-z
F-MILL
80.A
80.
LENGTH COMP
0.
E -MILL
10.A
10.
0.
CTR-DR
20.
0.
DRILL
10.
0.
DRILL
7.
0.
TAP
8.
8.
0.
Move the cursor to this position.
- The following menu will then be displayed in the menu display area:
EDIT
TEACH
INCR.
TOOL
PREVIOUS
NEXT
SERACH
PAGE
PAGE
[2] Press the menu key EDIT.

- The following menu will be displayed.
TOOL
TOOL NAME
T-DATA
TOOL
ERASE
ORDER
MOVE
ASSIGN
[3] Press the menu key TOOL ERASE.

- This will cause the display status of TOOL ERASE to reverse and the
message CURSOR POSITION ERASE ? to present.
[4] Press the input key
- Data in the cursor position will be erased.

(5) TOOL NAME ORDER (Valid only for machines with a random ATC feature)
For machines having a random ATC feature, use this menu item if the tool data
previously registered on the TOOL DATA display is to be rearranged in order
of tool name.
[1] The following menu is being indicated in the menu display area:
EDIT
TEACH
INCR.
4-58
TOOL
PREVIOUS
NEXT
SERACH
PAGE
PAGE

- The following menu will then be displayed.
TOOL
TOOL NAME
T-DATA
TOOL
ERASE
ORDER
MOVE
ASSIGN
[3] Press the menu key TOOL NAME ORDER.

- This will cause the display of TOOL NAME ORDER to reverse and the
message LAYOUT ON TOOLNAME ORDER <INP>? to display.
- The tool data will be rearranged in order of tool name.

If there are more than one set of tool data having the same name, those sets
of tool data will be rearranged in order of the smaller nominal diameter first.
The order of tool name refers to the following order:
CTR-DR DRILL REAM TAP (M, U, PT, PF, PS, OTHER, in that
order) BK FACE B-B BAR CHF-M F-MILL E-MILL

HP VAC T.SENS B-E-MILL
OTHER C
Example:
To rearrange the tool data on the following display:
TNO.
PKNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
F-MILL
80.A
80.
E-MILL
10.A
10.
0.
CTR-DR
20.
0.
10
DRILL
10.
0.
DRILL
7.
0.
TAP
8.
8.
0.
ACT-z LENGTH
COMP.
0.
TOOL NAME ORDER +
TNO.
PKNO.
TOOL
CTR-DR
NOM-z
10
F-MILL
E-MILL
10.A
ACT-z LENGTH
COMP.
20.
0.
DRILL
7.
0.
DRILL
10.
0.
8.
8.
0.
80.A
80.
0.
10.
0.
TAP M
(6) Setting PKNO. data (Valid only for machine with a random ATC feature)
If your machine has a random ATC feature, use the following procedure to set
PKNO. item on the TOOL DATA display (PKNO. data can be set even during
the write-protected data mode).
4-59
[1] Using the key
or
, move the cursor to a position under PKNO. item
where you want to set data.

- The message POCKET NUMBER? will be displayed.
[2] Specify the pocket number, and press the input key
- The pocket number will be set in PKNO. item.

Example:
On the following display, if 3 is to be set as the pocket number of the end-mill
tool having tool number 2:
TNO.
PKNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
F-MILL
80.A
80.
E-MILL
10.A
10.
0.
CTR-DR
20.
0.
10
DRILL
10.
0.
DRILL
7.
0.
TAP M
8.
8.
0.
ACT-z LENGTH
COMP.
0.
To set 3 in the PKNO. item, press the
4-6-1
and
Tool dataGROUP NO. ASSIGNMENT (Option)

1. Overview
The tool data option GROUP NO. ASSIGNMENT allows you to assign group
numbers and ID (identification) numbers to your MAZATROL tool data. With
this option, you can perform EIA/ISO program tool selection and tool life
management using the MAZATROL tool data. Selection of the data of the
TOOL LIFE INDEX display or the data of the TOOL DATA display can be
made using a parameter.
2.
Screen display (TOOL DATA display)

Group numbers (GROUP NO.) and ID numbers (ID NO.) are displayed in the
same position as that of tool name (TOOL) and nominal diameter (NOM-z)
display.
Use menu keys to select between EIA/ISO data display and MAZATROL data
display.
4-60
TNO. GROUP NO. ID NO. ACT-z LENGTH COMP. AUXIL. THR. HP LIFE (M) TIME (M)
1
2
3
4
TNO. TOOL NOM-z ACT-z LENGTH COMP.
1
5
6
2
3
7
8
4
5
9
10
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
9
10
15
16
11
12
13
14
* * * TOOL DATA * * *
EDIT
15
16
TEACH
INCR.
MAZATROL
DATA
PREVIOUS
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE
* * * TOOL DATA * * *
EDIT
TEACH
INCR.
EIA/ISO
DATA
Data type selection

M3S024
TOOL DATA display

3. Description of group numbers and ID numbers
(1) Group number (GROUP NO.)
Description:
A group number identifies a tool group. Tools with the
same number as a group number are handled as spare
tools of that group number.
Setting range: Eight decimal digits (0 to 99999999)
(2) ID number (ID NO.)
Description:
An ID number identifies a tool. Use ID numbers for
machines having a tool identification feature. (For machines
not having a tool identification feature, ID numbers become
insignificant. In this case, these numbers can be used to
identify tools.)
Setting range: There are the following two ranges of ID number setting.
Which is to be applied depends on the type of tool ID:
1) Eight decimal digits (0 to 99999999)
2) Seven hexadecimal digits (0 to FFFFFFF)
Use method 2) for machines not having a tool identification
feature.
4-61
4. Editing
Any group number GROUP NO. or ID number ID NO. can be set,
irrespective of the tool name TOOL''. It depends on the tool type that has
been set for TOOL, however, whether you can set tool diameter data ACT-z,
tool tip position offset data COMP.'', auxiliary data AUXIL.'', thrust force data
THR.'', horsepower data HP'', tool life data LIFE(M)'', and tool operation
time data TIME (M)''.
(1) How to set group numbers or ID numbers
[1] Move the cursor to GROUP NO. item or ID NO. item.
TNO. GROUP NO. ID NO. ACT-z LENGTH COMP.
AUXIL. THR. HP LIFE (M) TIME (M)
1
!
220.589
3.
50
42
256.472
3.
50
9.956
198.576
0.
40
Note:
For tool data not having a registered tool name, the cursor cannot be moved
beyond the right of ID NO item.
[2] Set data using the numeric keys.
1
0000000
0000000
220.589
3.
50
42
256.472
3.
50
9.956
198.576
0.
40
Notes:
1. You can set tool diameter data ACT-z, length data LENGTH, thrust
force data THR., horsepower data HP, tool life data LIFE (M), and
tool operation time data TIME (M) if a group number is set for tool data
not having a registered tool name.
2. Both group numbers and ID numbers can be displayed just by setting data
for either GROUP NO. item or ID NO. item.
4-62
(2) Editing using menu

The tool editing menu on the MAZATROL data display and those of the
EIA/ISO data display partly differ in contents.
Tool editing menu on the MAZATROL data display
TOOL
TOOL NAME
T-DATA
TOOL
ERASE
ORDER
MOVE
ASSIGN
Tool editing menu on the EIA/ISO data display

INPUT
T-DATA
CANCEL
MOVE
Menu key description

TOOL ERASE:
Deletes entire one line of tool data. (The group

number and ID number on that line are also deleted.)
TOOL NAME ORDER: Rearranges tool data on a tool name basis.
T-DATA MOVE:
Interchanges two sets of tool data.
TOOL ASSIGN:
INPUT CANCEL:
Registers MAZATROL tool data for TOOL item.

Deletes only the group number and ID number. (For
data not having a registered tool name, other data is
also deleted.)
The following describes the procedure to perform INPUT CANCEL menu

function :
[1] Move the cursor to the TNO. item corresponding to the data you want to delete
on the TOOL DATA display.
[2] Press the EDIT menu key, and then press the INPUT CANCEL menu key.
. The registered group number and the ID number will
then be deleted.
5. Machine action
Use the following parameter to specify whether the data of the TOOL DATA
display or the data of the TOOL LIFE INDEX display is to be used to select
tools and manage tool lives:
User parameter F94, bit 7
0: Using the data of the TOOL DATA display (MAZATROL)
1: Using the data of the TOOL LIFE INDEX display
4-63
Note:
If the TOOL DATA display (MAZATROL) is selected, you will use tool name data
TOOL, nominal diameter data NOM-z, suffix data, tool diameter data ACT-z,
length data LENGTH, thrust force data THR., horsepower data HP, tool life
data LIFE (M), and tool operation time data TIME (M).
(1) Tool selection
Tools can be selected using one of the two methods listed below. The method
used is to be selected using the following parameter:
0: Selection on a group number basis
1: Selection on a tool number basis
1) Selection on a group number basis

Specify a programmed tool command (T-command) by group number
Example:
Program: T01T00M06;
198.578
0.
0000000
220.589
3.
0000000
256.472
6.
9.986
198.256
0.
TOOL DATA display

In this example, TNO. 2 is selected.
Note:
If the selected group number is an unregistered one, that selected number will
be regarded as a tool number ,and the tool of that number wil be selected.
2) Selection on a tool number basis
Specify a programmed tool command (T-command) by tool number.
Example:
Program: T01T00M06;
1
198.578
0.
00000000
220.589
3.
00000000
256.472
6.
9.986
198.256
0.
TOOL DATA display

In this example, TNO. 1 is selected.
4-64
(2) Tool life management

For spare tool search associated with tool life management, the form of
identifying and searching for a spare tool is to be selected using user
parameters.
1) Identifying a spare tool
Tools having the same group number are regarded as spare tools
(Group number scheme)
Tools having the same tool name, nominal diameter, and suffix are regarded
as spare tools
(Tool name scheme)
0: Group number scheme
1: Tool name scheme
2) Searching for a spare tool
Searching spare tools in order of registered tool number
(Tool registration order scheme)
Searching for a spare tool in order of the longest tool life first
(Equal-life scheme)
0: Tool registration order scheme
1: Equal-life scheme
These four methods are described in detail below.
a) Group number scheme
All tools having the same group number that have been registered under group
numbers are regarded as spare tools. This scheme is the same as that which
is to be used on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display.
Example:
12345678
0000000
12345678
0000000
12345678
0000000
87654321
0000000
87654321
0000000
4
5
6
7
TOOL DATA display

- Tool registered under TNO. 2 and TNO. 3 are spares for tools registered
under TNO. 1.
- Tools registered under TNO. 7 are spares for tools registered under TNO.
5.
4-65
b) Tool name scheme

All tools having the same tool name, nominal diameter, and suffix are regarded
as spare tools. This scheme is the same as that which is to be used for tool life
management of MAZATROL programs.
Example:
TNO. TOOL NOM-z
10.A
ACT-z LENGTH COMP.

10.
AUXIL. THR.
0.
HP
LIFE (M) TIME (M)
E-MILL
E-MILL
10.A
10.
0.
E-MILL
10.C
10.
0.
E-MILL
10.A
10.
0.
TOOL DATA display

- Tools registered under TNO. 2 and TNO. 4 are spares for tools registered
under TNO. 1.
c) Tool registration order scheme
The tool registration order scheme refers to a scheme in which a spare tool is
to be found by searching in ascending order of tool number and the next spare
tool is to be searched for when the life of the tool being used expires.
Example:
0000000
198.746
3.
50
50
0000000
220.589
3.
50
0000000
256.472
3.
50
0000000
205.784
3.
50
TOOL DATA display

TNO. 2 is selected.
Program T01T00M06;
Note:
In this example, the machine acts the same, irrespective of whether you select
the tool number scheme or the group number scheme.
d) Equal-life scheme
The equal-life sheme refers to a scheme in which spare tool search is
performed in order of the longest tool life first. For this scheme, changeover
from the current tool to the next one may occur even if the life of the former
does not expire.
4-66
Example:
0000000
198.746
3.
50
35
0000000
220.589
3.
50
42
0000000
256.472
3.
50
0000000
205.784
3.
50
28
TOOL DATA display

TNO. 3 is selected.
Program T01T00M06;
(3) Tool offsetting

If tool management using the TOOL DATA display is selected (by setting bit 7
of user parameter F94 to 0), the following user parameters must be set to
make tool diameter (ACT-z) and length (LENGTH) offset data valid: (See the
Programming manual for MAZATROL M-32 EIA/ISO for further details.)
1: Tool diameter data (ACT-z) is made valid.

1: Length data (LENGTH) is made valid.
1: Length (LENGTH) offset data is not
cancelled by execution of a reference-point
return command.
Note:
During offsetting based on the tool diameter and length data of the TOOL
DATA display, these two types of data will be added to tool diameter and
length offset data you are to set in the program using commands G41 to G44.
Example:
For tool length offsetting, if you set:
G43Z0. H01;
Length = 100., H01 = 50.
then the offset data becomes 150.
6. Precautions
Tool life management (spare tool search) is not performed for tool path check.
4-6-2
Tool data INVALIDATION (Option)

1. Overview
INVALIDATION is an option that makes registered tool data on the TOOL
DATA display invalid before the program is executed. On the invalidated tool
data line, tool names (TOOL) and nominal diameters (NOM-z), (and as data
options, group numbers (GROUP NO.) and ID numbers (ID NO.)) are
highlighted purple for distinction from valid tool data.
Using this option, you can select tools from all those of the same type or set
the tools not to be used without deleting the tool data before executing the
program.
4-67
2. Setting the option

Use the appropriate menu key to specify whether you want to make tool data
valid or invalid.
[1] Move the cursor to the data line to be made valid/invalid.
TNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
ACT-z
LENGTH
COMP.
DRILL
5.A
180.153
1.5
DRILL
10.A
220.589
3.
DRILL
20.A
256.472
3.
E-MILL
10.B
9.956
198.576
0.
CTR-DR
10.
198.896
0.2
E-MILL
5.
5.
123.
0.

EDIT
TEACH
INCR.
EIA/ISO
TOOL
PREVIOUS
NEXT
DATA
SERACH
PAGE
PAGE

TOOL
TOOL NAME
T-DATA
TOOL
TOOL DATA
TOOL DATA
ERASE
ORDER
MOVE
ASSIGN
VALID
INVALID
[3] If the selected data is to be made valid/invalid, press the menu key TOOL
DATA VALID, TOOL DATA INVALID respectively.
The tool name and the nominal diameter are highlighted purple if invalid, or not
highlighted if valid.
TNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
ACT-z
LENGTH
COMP.
DRILL
5.A
180.153
1.5
DRILL
10.A
220.589
3.
DRILL
20.A
256.472
3.
10.B
9.956
198.576
0.
198.896
0.2
123.
0.
E-MILL
CTR-DR
10.
E-MILL
5.
5.
3. Machine action
Only in the following cases, MAZATROL tool data designated as invalid and
highlighted purple are regarded as invalid tool data.
- When automatic operation is selected
- When tool path check is performed
- When the TOOL LAYOUT display is called
4-68
(1) When automatic operation is selected

The machine action differs as follows between MAZATROL program automatic
operation and EIA/ISO program automatic operation:
1) MAZATROL program operation
Invalid tools are excluded from a list of usable tools. An alarm 626 NO
TOOL IN MAGAZINE will be displayed if an alternative, usable tool of the
same type is not present.
2) EIA/ISO program operation
The MAZATROL tool data invalidation option is inoperative for automatic
operation using EIA/ISO programs, since the option normally operates
independently of MAZATROL tool data. Only if MAZATROL tool length and
diameter offset data is valid, however, does this option become operative.
In this case, if the MAZATROL tool data of the selected tool number is
invalid, operation will stop with the display of an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL
DESIGNATED after tool change has been done.
Example:
TNO. TOOL NOM-z
T01 T02 M06;
G90 G54;
ACT-z LENGTH COMP.
AUXIL. THR.
HP
LIFE (M) TIME (M)
E-MILL
10.A
9.965
185.653
0.
0.
2 CTR-DR
8.B
169.157
0.
DRILL
8.B
175.469
2.4
F-MILL 100.B
100.
98.487
0.
Program
MAZATROL tool data

If MAZATROL tool length and diameter offset data is valid (that is, if tool
diameter data is made valid using bit 7 of user parameter F92 and tool
length data is made valid using bit 3 of user parameter F93):
Operation will stop with the display of an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL
DESIGNATED.
If MAZATROL tool length and diameter offset data is invalid:
Normal operation continues.
Note:
Operation will also stop with an alarm display, if a block that contains a
command for tool change with an invalid tool is found during EIA/ISO search
associated with restart.
(2) When tool path check is to be performed
The machine action differs as follows between tool path check using a
MAZATROL program and tool path check using an EIA/ISO program:
1) During tool path check using a MAZATROL program
Invalid tools are not selected. If an alternative, usable tool of the same type
is not present, a tool path will be drawn in the absence of a tool (diameter
offsetting will use the tool nominal diameter data existing in the program).
2) During tool path check using an EIA/ISO program
The machine act becomes similar to that existing during automatic
operation.
4-69
(3) When the TOOL LAYOUT display is selected

All invalid tools will be highlighted purple.
CURRENT
NEXT
PKNO.
17
18
19
TOOL NOM-z
TAP M
8.
DRILL
15.5
E-MILL
13.4
4
5
6
F-MILL
100.B
20
21
22
E-MILL
DRILL
DRILL
12.3
23.
6.9
7
8
9
E-MILL
20.A
E-MILL
20.B
23
24
25
DRILL
E-MILL
E-MILL
7.5
13.3
30.D
16.
26
27
28
E-MILL
E-MILL
DRILL
7.8
28.4
8.7
29
30
DRILL
E-MILL
5.1
26.
10
11
12
DRILL
13
14
15
DRILL
10.4
16
DRILL
22.
WORK NO. 10
PKNO.
PKNO.
TOOL NOM-z
0
CTR-DR
12.A
0
DRILL
10.A
0
DRILL
20.
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
PKNO.
TOOL NOM-z
1
E-MILL
10.A
2
CTR-DR
8.B
3
DRILL
8.B
DRILL
TOOL
30.
PAGE1/1
PAGE1/1
* * * TOOL LAYOUT * * *
WORK NO.
DRUM NO.
NOM-z
( )
SPARE T
ERASE
PKNO.
CLEAR
PKNO.
SHIFT
PKNO.
ASSIGN
SPARE T
ADDITION
LAYOUT
FINISH
NEXT
PAGE
M3S025
TOOL LAYOUT display

- With PKNO. SHIFT, the tool numbers of invalid tools are not assigned to
tools displayed under NEXT.
4. Operator actions for a machine having the tool data option GROUP NO.
ASSIGNMENT, and the machine action
(1) Screen display
As with the usual MAZATROL data display mode, invalid tools during the
EIA/ISO data display mode (group number display) are highlighted purple on
the screen.
TNO. TOOL NOM-z
1
ACT-z LENGTH COMP.
AUXIL. THR.
HP
LIFE (M) TIME (M)
E-MILL
10.A
9.965 185.653
0.
0.
2 CTR-DR
8.B
169.157
0.
DRILL
8.B
175.469
2.4
F-MILL 100.A
100.
198.487
0.
MAZATROL data display mode

TNO.GROUP NO. ID NO. ACT-z LENGTHCOMP. AUXIL.
THR. HP
LIFE (M) TIME (M)
12345678
0000000
9.965 185.653
0.
0.
23456789
0000000
169.157
0.
34567890
0000000
175.469
2.4
45678901
0000000 100.
198.487
0.
EIA/ISO data display mode
4-70
(2) Machine action

When the MAZATROL tool data option GROUP NO. ASSIGNMENT is used,
tool commands in an EIA/ISO program are executed according to the group
number data of the MAZATROL tool data display.
The machine action during automatic operation (or tool path check) based on
an EIA/ISO program, therefore, differs from that occurring with the tool data
option GROUP NO. ASSIGNMENT not being used.
The machine acts as follows according to the particular method of selecting
tools:
1) Group number scheme (User parameter F94, bit 4 = 0)
- The machine will stop with the display of an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL
DESIGNATED if the tools of the selected group number are all invalid
ones.
- If the tools of the selected group number include valid ones (life-expired or
broken tools included), then these valid tools will be searched for a spare
tool.
2) Tool number scheme (User parameter F92, bit 4 = 1)
- When the tool of the selected tool number is invalid:
If a group number has been set, a spare tool search will be made
using that group number. The machine action after the search has
been made is the same as that described for the group number
scheme above.
If a group number has not been set, an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL
DESIGNATED will result.
Examples of action:
TNO.GROUP NO. ID NO.
1
12345678
0000000
ACT-z LENGTH COMP. AUXIL. THR. HP

!
154.876
0.
9.965 187.584
100.
LIFE (M) TIME (M)
87654321
0000000
4.986 154.784
87654321
0000000
4.957 159.764
TOOL DATA display

* Tools of TNO. 1 and TNO. 3 are invalid ones.
Differences in machine action between the two tool selection schemes:
Group number scheme
Tool number scheme
Example 1: If T12345678T0M06; is set on the TOOL
Example 1:
DATA display above:

An alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED results.
If T01T0M06; is set on the TOOL DATA
display above:
An alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED results.
Example 2: If T87654321T0M06; is set on the TOOL
Example 2:
DATA display above:

Tool number (TNO.) 4 is selected.
display above:
Tool number (TNO.) 4 is selected.
If T03T0M06; is set on the TOOL DATA
Note:
The machine action during automatic operation and that of tool path check are
almost the same.
4-71
4-7
TOOL LAYOUT Display

Function:
- This display should be called on the screen when assigning pocket numbers to
the tools to be used for machining. (The operation of assigning pocket numbers to
the tools to be used is referred to as tool layout.)
- This display consists of two subdisplays: a CURRENT display (left half of the
screen display) and a NEXT display (right half of the screen display).
The CURRENT display indicates the names and nominal diameters of the tools
which already are each assigned a pocket number. That is, the CURRENT display
indicates the same status of tool registration as with the TOOL DATA display.
The NEXT display indicates the names and nominal diameters of all the tools
necessary to execute the specified machining program.
- A tool name(s) that has already been registered can be erased on the CURRENT
display.
- The two component display can be used only when executing a MAZATROL
program.
CURRENT
WORK NO. 9999
NEXT
NOM-z
999.9*
PKNO.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
TOOL
********
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
PKNO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
Data of the TOOL LAYOUT display:
TOOL
********
NOM-z
999.9*
PKNO.
1
TOOL
********
NOM-z
999.9*
PKNO.
17
TOOL
********
NOM-z
999.9*
PAGE 1/5
PAGE 1/
* * * TOOL LAYOUT * * *
( )
WORK NO.
DRUM NO.
SPARE T
PKNO.
PKNO.
PKNO.
SPARE T
LAYOUT
NEXT
ERASE
CLEAR
SHIFT
ASSIGN
ADDITION
FINISH
PAGE
M3S026
Note:
Values in the display denote the maximum value of each type of data.
4-72
Description of data:
No.
Data name
Unit
Description
PKNO.
Pocket number
TOOL
Tool name
NOM-z
mm (inch)
Nominal diameter of the tool

Suffix (Code that identifies tools of the same nominal diameter)
WORK NO.
Workpiece number of the specified program
Display operations:
1. Tool layout procedure
To execute a machining program, the tools necessary for machining must be
mounted in each pocket of a tool drum in advance. The operation of assigning
pocket numbers to the tools to be used for machining is referred to as tool
layout, and its operating procedure is described below.
[1] First, call up the TOOL LAYOUT display on the screen.
- The names and nominal diameters of the tools which have already been
registered will be indicated on the CURRENT display. (No display will be
presented if no tools have been registered.)
- After that, the following menu will be indicated in the menu display area:
WORK NO. DRUM NO.
SPARE T
PKNO.
PKNO.
PKNO.
SPARE T
LAYOUT
NEXT
ERASE
CLEAR
SHIFT
ASSIGN
ADDITION
FINISH
PAGE
This will have already been placed in a reverse-display

status by the time that the display is called on the screen.
- The message WORKPIECE PROGRAM NUMBER? will be displayed.

[2] Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the workpiece number of the
machining program to be executed. Then, press the input key
Example:
When laying out the tools to be used under the program whose workpiece
number is 123:
Press the
, and
keys, in this order.
- This will cause the reverse-display status of WORK NO. to clear and the
input workpiece number to display in the WORK NO. item (data portion ).
- The names and nominal diameters of all the tools to be used under the
program whose workpiece number has been input will be indicated on the
NEXT display. Under the PKNO. item, 0 will be displayed for any tool name.
- The message PKNO. SHIFT OR ASSIGN <MENU>? will be displayed.
4-73
[3] Subsequent operations differ according to several factors such as the

registration status of the tools which are already registered on the CURRENT
display. However, separate or combined use of the three methods described
below makes it possible in any cases to assign pocket numbers to all the tools
to be used. Select the most appropriate method according to the particular toolregistration or other status.
(A) Pocket-number shift
(B) Automatic pocket-number assignment
(C) Manual pocket-number assignment
(A) Pocket-number shift
If there are the same tools as those which are already registered on the
CURRENT display among the tools being indicated on the NEXT display then,
it is no longer necessary to assign pocket numbers to such tools. That is, the
pocket numbers that have already been assigned can be shifted as they are.
This method is referred to as pocket-number shift. Once a pocket-number shift
operation has been carried out, it suffices just to assign pocket numbers to the
tools for which no shift operations have been carried out. Use of this method
allows prevention of reassignment of different pocket numbers to a tool or of
the same pocket number to more than one tool. It will also save time in
assignment.
[A-1] Press the menu key PKNO. SHIFT.
- This will cause the display status of PKNO. SHIFT to reverse and the
message POCKET NO. SHIFT <INPUT>? to present.
[A-2] Press the input key
- If there are the same tools as those which are already registered on the
CURRENT display among the tools being indicated on the NEXT display,
then the pocket numbers already assigned under PKNO. of the
corresponding tool names on the NEXT display will shift automatically and
will be indicated in reverse form.
Example:
If the following data is displayed when the workpiece number of a machining program has been input in the procedural step [2] above:
CURRENT
NEXT
PKNO. TOOL NOM-z PKNO. TOOL NOM-z
WORK NO. 123
F-MILL 80.A
17
F-MILL 80.A
17
E-MILL 10.A
18
E-MILL 10.A
18
TAP M
CHF-M 20.A
8.
19
CTR-DR 20.
19
20
DRILL
10.
21
DRILL
7.
21
22
TAP
M 8.
22
4-74
* Of the tools being indicated on the NEXT display, a face-mill with a

nominal diameter of 80 mm (3.15 in), and end-mill with a nominal diameter
of 10 mm (0.39 in), and a tap with a nominal diameter of 8 mm (0.31 in)
are already registered on the CURRENT display. Here, if procedural steps
[A-1] and [A-2] are carried out, then the display will change as follows:
CURRENT
NEXT
WORK NO. 123
F-MILL 80.A
17
F-MILL 80.A
17
E-MILL 10.A
18
E-MILL 10.A
18
TAP M
CHF-M 20.A
8.
19
CTR-DR 20.
19
20
DRILL
10.
20
21
DRILL
7.
21
22
TAP M 8.
22
The pocket numbers on the CURRENT display will shift automatically and
their display status will be reversed.
- Subsequently, the reverse-display status of PKNO. SHIFT will be cleared.
Note:
In the above example, when pocket numbers are assigned to all the
remaining tools (that is, a spot drill with a nominal diameter of 20 mm
(0.79 in), a drill with a nominal diameter of 10 mm (0.39 in), and a drill
with a nominal diameter of 7 mm (0.28 in)) by method (B) or (C)
described below, the pocket-number assignment procedure for all the
tools will be completed.
(B) Automatic pocket-number assignment
This method is one in which, among the tool names being displayed on the
NEXT display, all those with pocket numbers of 0 (undetermined) are
automatically assigned serial pocket numbers, starting with the top tool name
on the display first.
[B-1] Press the menu key PKNO. ASSIGN.
- This will cause the display status of PKNO. ASSIGN to reverse and the
message POCKET NO. ASSIGN <INPUT>? to present.
[B-2] Press the input key
- Serial pocket numbers will then be automatically assigned to each tool that
has a pocket number of 0 (undetermined), starting with the top one on the
display first.
Example 1:
When the names of the tools to be used are being indicated on the NEXT
display as shown next:
4-75
NEXT
WORK NO. 123
PKNO.
TOOL
F-MILL
NOM-z
E-MILL
10.A
CTR-DR
20.
DRILL
10.
DRILL
7.
TAP
PKNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
80.A
8.
Here, if procedural steps [B-1] and [B-2] are carried out, then the display
will change as follows:
NEXT
WORK NO. 123
PKNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
F-MILL
80.A
E-MILL
10.A
CTR-DR
20.
DRILL
10.
DRILL
7.
TAP M
8.
PKNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
Example 2:
In the example shown below, if pocket numbers are already assigned to the
face-mill with a nominal diameter of 80 mm (3.15 in), the end-mill with a
nominal diameter of 10 mm (0.39 in), and the tap with a nominal diameter
of 8 mm (0.31 in) (see the example in the description of Pocket-number
shift above):
NEXT
WORK NO. 123
PKNO.
TOOL
F-MILL
E-MILL
10.A
CTR-DR
20.
DRILL
10.
DRILL
7.
TAP M
8.
4-76
NOM-z
80.A
PKNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
Here, if procedural steps [B-1] and [B-2] are carried out, then the display
will change as follows:
NEXT
WORK NO. 123
PKNO.
TOOL
F-MILL
NOM-z
E-MILL
10.A
CTR-DR
20.
DRILL
10.
DRILL
7.
TAP M
8.
PKNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
80.A
Except the pocket numbers already assigned (i.e., pocket number 1, 2,

and 3), serial ones will be assigned starting with the top tool name on the
display first.
- Subsequently, the reverse-display state of PKNO. ASSIGN will be
cleared.
Note:
In this method, the data being indicated on the CURRENT display will be
disregarded.
(C) Manual pocket-number and tool interference data assignment
This method is one in which the tools being indicated on the NEXT display are
respectively assigned serial pocket numbers and tool interference data one by
one.
[C-1] Press either the cursor key

- If the key
or
to call the cursor on the screen.
is pressed, the cursor will appear in the position of the first
PKNO. item on the NEXT display.

- If the key
is pressed, the cursor will appear in the position of the final
PKNO. item on the NEXT display.
[C-2] Press either the cursor key
or
to move the cursor to the row in
which the tool name to be assigned a pocket number is being displayed.

Example:
If the screen on the NEXT display is presented as shown below (see the
example given in the description of Pocket-number shift above) and
pocket number 4 and tool interference data are to be assigned to a spot
drill with a nominal diameter of 20 mm (0.79 inch):
4-77
NEXT
WORK NO. 123
PKNO.
TOOL
F-MILL
NOM-z
E-MILL
10.A
CTR-DR
20.
DRILL
10.
DRILL
7.
TAP M
8.
PKNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
80.A
- The message POCKET NO.? will be displayed.

[C-3] Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the pocket number to be
assigned. Then, press the input key
- The input pocket number will then be displayed in the position where the
cursor is blinking.
- In the example shown above, press the
[C-4] Pressing
and
keys in that order.
moves cursor to the right of the nominal diameter data
suffix.
- The message TOOL INTERFERENCE ID CODE? will be displayed,
followed by this menu:
ORDINARY
LARGE
MG+DIRT
MGDIRT.
SMALL
DIAMETER
[C-5] Press the menu key that corresponds to the tool interference data you want
to set.
- The tool interference data will be displayed at the cursor.
- In the example shown above, press the menu key LARGE L.
The display will then change as follows:
NEXT
WORK NO. 123
PKNO.
TOOL
F-MILL
80.A
E-MILL
10.A
CTR-DR
20.L
DRILL
10.
DRILL
7.
TAP M
8.
4-78
NOM-z
PKNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
Note:
By repeating procedural steps [C-2] through [C-5], it becomes possible to
assign the desired pocket numbers to all tools whose pocket number display is
0 (undetermined).
However, it is not possible to assign the same pocket number as that which
has already been used on the NEXT display.
After pocket numbers have been assigned to all the required tools on the NEXT
display by one or more of the methods (A), (B), and (C), proceed with the
operations described below.
[4] Press the menu key LAYOUT FINISH.

- This will cause the display status of LAYOUT FINISH to reverse and the
message LAYOUT FINISH ? to present.
- The names of the tools to which pocket numbers have been assigned on the
NEXT display will then be indicated on the CURRENT display in order of
pocket number.
Notes:
1. The display on the NEXT display will remain unchanged.
2. Even if the pocket numbers that have been assigned on the NEXT display
are already used on the CURRENT display, the tool names with the former
will govern and those with the latter will be erased.
Example:
If the data on the CURRENT and NEXT displays is as shown below:
CURRENT
NEXT
WORK NO. 123
F-MILL 80.A
17
F-MILL 80.A
E-MILL 10.A
18
E-MILL 10.A
TAP M
19
CTR-DR 20.
CHF-M 20.A
8.
20
DRILL
10.
21
DRILL
7.
22
TAP
4-79
M 8.
Here, if procedural steps [4] and [5] are carried out, the display will change as
follows:
CURRENT
NEXT
WORK NO. 123
F-MILL 80.A
17
F-MILL 80.A
E-MILL 10.A
18
E-MILL 10.A
TAP M 8.
19
CTR-DR 20.
CTR-DR 20.
20
DRILL
DRILL
10.
21
DRILL
DRILL
7.
22
TAP
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
10.
7.
M 8.
That is, the tool names with pocket numbers assigned on the NEXT display will
be indicated in order of pocket number on the CURRENT display.
The chamfering cutter with a nominal diameter of 20 mm (0.79 in) that has
been registered under pocket number 4 will be erased automatically (see Note
2 above).
- The reverse-display status of LAYOUT FINISH will be cleared, and the
message LAYOUT FINISH? will be displayed to indicate that all the tool
layout operations have been finished.
Note:
If, after you have pressed LAYOUT FINISH following selection of an intramagazine interference data type, tools that are likely to interfere with other tools or
pockets are found, then the layout operation will stop in the middle and the data
display of the tools that are likely to interfere will be highlighted red.
(1) Clearing pocket numbers
If a wrong pocket number has been assigned during tool layout on the NEXT
display, carry out the layout operation once again after resetting all the tool
pocket numbers to 0 using the following procedure.
[1] Press the menu key PKNO. CLEAR.
- This will cause the display status of PKNO. CLEAR to reverse and the
message POCKET NUMBER CLEAR ? to be indicated.
- All the pocket numbers that have been assigned on the NEXT display will be
reset to 0.
- The reverse-display status of PKNO. CLEAR will be released.
4-80
(2) Specifying a spare tool

If the tool data being indicated on the NEXT display includes the data of the
tool which needs a spare tool, it is possible to specify the spare tool on this
display.
[1] Press either the cursor key
or
to call the cursor on the NEXT
or
to move the cursor to the PKNO.
display.
[2] Press either the cursor key
data item of the tool which needs a spare tool.

Example:
When the data shown below is indicated on the NEXT display and a spare tool
is to be specified for the end-mill with a nominal diameter of 10 mm (0.39 in):
NEXT
WORK NO. 123
PKNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
F-MILL
80.A
E-MILL
CTR-DR
20.
DRILL
10.
DRILL
7.
PKNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
10.A
[3] Press the menu key SPARE T ADDITION.

- This will cause the display status of SPARE T ADDITION to reverse and the
message SPARE TOOL ADDITION <INPUT>? to present.
- The data of a spare tool will be displayed directly under the data of the tool
which needs a spare tool.
- In the example above, the display will change as follows:
NEXT
WORK NO. 123
PKNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
F-MILL
80.A
E-MILL
10.A
E-MILL
10.A
CTR-DR
20.
DRILL
10.
DRILL
7.
PKNO.
TOOL
NOM-z
- The reverse-display status of SPARE T ADDITION will be released.
4-81
Note:
The pocket number of a spare tool is displayed as 0 (undetermined), as shown
above.
Therefore, a pocket number must be assigned to the spare tool after the above
operation has been carried out.
(3) Erasing spare tool data

Proceed as follows to erase specified spare tool data:
[1] Press either the
or
cursor key to move the cursor to the PKNO.
item of the spare tool data to be erased.

- First call the cursor on the screen if it is not being indicated on the NEXT
display.
[2] Press the menu key SPARE T ERASE.
- This will cause the display status of SPARE T ERASE to reverse and the
message SPARE TOOL ERASE <INPUT>? to present.
- The spare tool data being indicated on the NEXT display will be erased.
- The reverse-display status of SPARE T ADDITION will be released.
2. Total/partial erasing procedures for registered tool data

All or part of the tool data registered on the CURRENT display of the TOOL
LAYOUT display, (i.e., the tool data that has already been laid out) can be
erased.
(1) Partial erasure of registered tool data
[1] Call up the TOOL LAYOUT display on the screen.
- The names and nominal diameters of the tools which have been registered on
the CURRENT display will then be indicated.
[2] Press the menu selector key (green key located to the right of the menu keys).
- This will present the display of the following menu in the menu display area:
[3] Press either the
or
TOOL
TOOL
LAYOUT
NEXT
SEARCH
ERASE
CANCEL
PAGE
cursor key to move the cursor to the PKNO.
item of the tool data to be erased.
4-82
Example:
When tools are registered as shown below and the data of the drill with a
nominal diameter of 10 mm (0.39 in) is to be erased:
CURRENT
WORK NO. 123

NOM-z
PKNO.
PKNO.
TOOL
F-MILL
80.A
17
E-MILL
10.A
18
TAP
8.
19
CTR-DR
20.
20
DRILL
10.
21
DRILL
7.
22
TOOL
NOM-z

- This will cause the display of TOOL ERASE to reverse and the message
CURSOR POSITION ERASE <INPUT>? will be displayed.
- The data of the tool indicated by blinking of the cursor will be erased.
- In the example above, the display will change as follows:
CURRENT
WORK NO. 123

NOM-z
PKNO.
PKNO.
TOOL
F-MILL
80.A
17
E-MILL
10.A
18
TAP
8.
19
CTR-DR
20.
20
5
6
TOOL
NOM-z
21
DRILL
7.
22
Tool data to have been erased
- The reverse-display status of TOOL ERASE will be released.

The various sets of registered tool data can be erased, one at a time, by repeating
procedural steps [3] through [5] above.
(2) Total erasure of registered tool data

[1] Call up the TOOL LAYOUT display on the screen.
[3] Press the menu key LAYOUT CANCEL.
- This will cause the display status of LAYOUT CANCEL to reverse and the
message LAYOUT CANCEL <9999 INPUT>? to present.
4-83
[4] Specify -9999 with the numeric keys and then press the input key
- To specify -9999, press the
, and

- The entire tool data that has been registered on the CURRENT display will
then be erased.
- In addition, the reverse-display status of LAYOUT CANCEL will be released.
3. Other menu functions and their usage
When the TOOL LAYOUT display is called on the screen, the following menu
will be indicated in the menu display area:
WORK NO. DRUM NO.
SPARE T
PKNO.
PKNO.
PKNO.
SPARE T
LAYOUT
NEXT
ERASE
CLEAR
SHIFT
ASSIGN
ADDITION
FINISH
PAGE
Depression of the menu selector key (green key located to the right of the
menu keys) changes the above menu over to the following menu:
TOOL
TOOL
LAYOUT
CURRENT
SEARCH
ERASE
CANCEL
PAGE
These menu items include those which have not been described in the section
of display operations 1. or 2. above. The functions and usage of such menu
data are described below.
(1) TOOL SEARCH
This menu data should be used to search for a tool name that is registered
on the CURRENT display.
The operating procedure is similar to that used for TOOL SEARCH of the
TOOL DATA display. For details, see the description of display operations
5.-(2), TOOL SEARCH, of section 4-6 TOOL DATA Display.
(2) NEXT PAGE
On the NEXT display, up to 32 sets of tool data can be indicated per page.
If the total number of tools to be used under the specified program exceeds
32, then the NEXT display also will have two pages or more. If the NEXT
display consists of two pages or more, the particular page can be changed
over to the next one by pressing the menu key NEXT PAGE.
(3) CURRENT PAGE
On the CURRENT display, up to 32 sets of tool data can be indicated per
page. Data having pocket number 33 onwards will be indicated on the
second and subsequent pages of the CURRENT display. Depression of the
menu key CURRENT PAGE changes the particular page of the CURRENT
display over to the next page.
4-84
4-8
PARAMETER Display
Function:
- This display is used to see the contents of parameters that have already been set
or to change parameters.
- User parameters and cutting condition parameters can be set on this display.
Data of the CUT COND. PARAM display:
MATERIAL
MAT.-1
STANDARD
******** C-SP (%)
FR
(%)
MAT.-2
********
C-SP (%)
FR
(%)
MAT.-3
********
C-SP (%)
FR
(%)
MAT.-4
********
C-SP (%)
FR
(%)
MAT.-5
********
C-SP (%)
FR
(%)
MAT.-6
********
C-SP (%)
FR
(%)
MAT.-7
********
C-SP (%)
FR
(%)
MAT.-8
********
C-SP (%)
FR
(%)
DRILL
REAMER
TAP
BOR BAR
MILL CUT
* * * CUT COND. PARAM * * *

( )
CUTTING
COND
USER
MACHINE
PREVIOUS
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE
M3S027
Note:
The above display is one on which parameters and cutting conditions are
prestored.
Parameters refer to various types of information, such as the machine constants
and other data necessary for numerical control of machines, data necessary to
cutting, etc.
The PARAMETER display contains prestored parameters. In the MAZATROL M-32,
the PARAMETER display is divided into 19 types of PARAMETER subdisplays as
shown below.
4-85
CUT COND. PARAM
CUT COND. PARAM NO.1
POINT CUTTING PARAMETER
LINE/FACE/3-D CUTTING PAR
USER PARAMETER NO.1
USER PARAMETER NO.2
Types of
USER PARAMETER NO.3
PARAMETER
sub-displays
USER PARAMETER NO.4
MACH CONSTANT PAR NO.1
PITCH ERROR COMP PAR.
For cutting-condition parameters:

Various parameters associated with
cutting conditions are prestored.
For user parameters:

User parameters, as well as various
parameters associated with cutting
conditions, are prestored.
For machine parameters:

Constants and other data that are
peculiar to machines are prestored.
The available types of parameters and their setting procedures are described in
detail in the separate volume Parameter List. Here, only the procedure of recalling
each PARAMETER subdisplays is described.
Procedure for calling up each PARAMETER subdisplay:
1. When the PARAMETER display has been changed over from another display,
the CUT COND. PARAM subdisplay is indicated with the following menu:
CUTTING
USER
MACHINE
COND
(1)
PREVIOUS
NEXT
PAGE
PAGE
Each time the menu key NEXT PAGE is pressed, subdisplays for cuttingconditions/parameters will change over in order of
.....
4-86
(2)
Each time the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE is pressed, subdisplays for
cutting-conditions/parameters will change over in order of
.....
2. When the menu key USER is pressed, the POINT CUTTING PARAMETER
subdisplay will be indicated.
(1) Each time the menu key NEXT PAGE is pressed, subdisplays for user
(2)
parameters will change over in order of . . . . .

.....
Each time the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE is pressed, subdisplays for
user parameters will change over in order of . . . . .
.....
3. When the menu key MACHINE is pressed, the MACH CONSTANT PAR NO.
1 subdisplay will be indicated.
(1) Each time the menu key NEXT PAGE is pressed, subdisplays for
machine parameters will change over in order of . . . . .
.....
(2) Each time the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE is pressed, subdisplays for
machine parameters will change over in order of . . . . .
.....
4. When the menu key CUTTING COND is pressed on each PARAMETER

subdisplay, the CUT COND. PARAM subdisplay will be indicated.
4-9
DATA IN/OUT Display

Function:
The DATA IN/OUT display is used to transfer the data prestored within the NC
equipment to an external unit or to transfer the data prestored within an external
unit to the NC equipment.
In the MAZATROL M-32, three types of DATA IN/OUT displays are available
according to the external unit to or from which data is to be transferred.
1. DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display
This display should be called when transferring data between the NC
equipment and a cassette tape unit or a microdisk unit.
2. DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display (Option)
equipment and a host CPU (central processing unit) or external NC equipment.
3. DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display
equipment and a tape reader/puncher or a microdisk unit.
4-87
Note:
In this manual, the procedure for data transfer between the NC equipment and a
microdisk unit is not described. For details of this procedure, refer to the Operating
manual that accompanies your microdisk unit.
Procedure for calling up each DATA IN/OUT display:
First press the display selector key (green key located to the left of the menu
keys).
This will cause the following menu to display:
POSITION COMMAND
TRACE
PROGRAM
TOOL
TOOL
TOOL
FILE
DATA
LAYOUT
PAR
DATA
I/O
Here, press the menu key DATA I/O. The following menu will then be displayed:
CMT I/O
DNC I/O
TAPE I/O
I/O STOP
- To call the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display, press the menu key CMT I/O.
- To call the DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display, press the menu key DNC I/O.
- To call the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display, press the menu key TAPE I/O.
General notes on data transfer:
1. The machining programs that have been created on the MAZATROL CAM M-1
(only Version L or its successors) or M-2 can be loaded into the MAZATROL
M-32. In that case, M1 or M2 programs will be automatically converted into M32 programs and then stored into the MAZATROL M-32. During program
loading, the message M2 PROGRAM BEING READ will be displayed on the
screen. (For further details, see display data portion on the DATA IN/OUT
(CMT) or DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display.)
Data other than that of machining programs, however, cannot be loaded into
the MAZATROL M-32, and neither can COMPARE operations be carried out.
Data that is saved within Version K or predecessors of the M-1 must be loaded
into the M-2 first and then loaded into the M-32.
2. The machining programs that have been created on the MAZATROL M-32
cannot be loaded into MAZATROL CAM M-1 or M-2.
3. If the parameters that are saved within Version B or predecessors of the
MAZATROL M-32 are loaded, then the message 514 DESIGNATED DATA
NOT COINCIDENT will be displayed, which you can disregard.
Parameters that are saved within Version C or its successors cannot be loaded
into Version B or its predecessors.
4-88
4-9-1
DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display

Function:
This display is used to store onto a cassette magnetic tape (CMT) the contents of
the machining programs or other data prestored within the memory of the NC
equipment, or to read the data prestored on a cassette tape into the memory of the
NC equipment.
On this display, the following operations can be carried out:
1. LOAD
Operation in which data is transferred from a cassette tape to the NC
equipment
2. SAVE
Operation in which data is transferred from the NC equipment to a cassette
tape
3. COMPARE
Operation in which comparison is made between the data prestored within the
NC equipment and the data preserved on a cassette tape
4. DIRECTORY
Operation in which the DATA IN/OUT display is indicated to check what type
of data is prestored on a cassette tape
4-89
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
Data of the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display:

CMT I/O
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
WORK NO.
9999 M
BLOCK
99999
COMMENT
* *
MODE (********)
WORK NO. (
(
(
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
)
)
)
)
(
(
(
(
TOOL DATA ( )
)
)
)
)
(
(
(
(
( )
)
)
)
)
(
(
(
(
( )
)
)
)
)
( )
TOOL FILE ( )
PARAMETER ( )
( )
( )
( )
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
EIA/ISO INFOR ( )
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PAGE 1/16
* * * DATA IN OUT (CMT) * * *

( )
LOAD
CMTNC
SAVE
NCCMT
COMPARE
NC=CMT
DIRECT
CMTNC
M3S028
Note:
No.
WORK NO.
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
Data name
M or E
Unit
Description
Workpiece number of the program prestored within the NC
equipment
Program identification code
M
E
: MAZATROL program
: EIA/ISO program
BLOCK
Number of blocks that have been used during program execution

- For MAZATROL programs, one line is calculated as one
block.
- For EIA/ISO programs, 50 characters are calculated as one
block.
COMMENT
Program name
MODE
Data transfer mode (LOAD, SAVE, COMPARE, or

DIRECTORY)
WORK NO.
Workpiece number of the program to be transferred
TOOL DATA
Transfer/no transfer of the tool data registered on the TOOL

DATA display
- Either 1 (transfer) or 0 (no transfer) is displayed in
parentheses.
- Under drum change specifications (option), the four sets of
parentheses correspond to drum No.1, drum No.2, drum No.3,
and drum No.4, respectively, from the left.
4-90
No.
Data name
Unit
Description
TOOL FILE
Transfer/no transfer of the tool data registered on the TOOL FILE

display
- Either 1 (transfer) or 0 (no transfer) is displayed in parentheses.
PARAMETER
Transfer/no transfer of parameters

- Either 1 (transfer) or 0 (no transfer) is displayed in parentheses.
EIA/ISO INFOR
Transfer/no transfer of EIA/ISO information

- Transfer/no transfer of tool offset data is indicated by either 1
(transfer) or 0 (no transfer), respectively, in the leftmost
parentheses.
- Transfer/no transfer of work offset data is indicated by either 1
(transfer) or 0 (no transfer), respectively, in the parentheses
second from the left.
- Transfer/no transfer of macrovariables is indicated by either 1
(transfer) or 0 (no transfer), respectively, in the parentheses third
from the left.
- Transfer/no transfer of tool-life control data is indicated by either 1
(transfer) or 0 (no transfer), respectively, in the rightmost
parentheses.
The message M2 PROGRAM BEING READ? is displayed in this

position while the NC equipment is reading the M1 or M2 program.
Display operations:
1. LOAD operation
Proceed as follows to transfer data from a cassette tape to the NC equipment:
[1] Set onto the cassette deck the cassette tape to be loaded.
[2] Call the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display on the screen.
- This will cause the following menu to display in the menu display area:
LOAD
SAVE
CMT MC NCCMT
COMPARE
DIRECT
NC=CMT
CMTNC
[3] Press the menu key LOAD CMT NC.

- LOAD will then be displayed in the position of the MODE item (data portion
).
- The following menu will be displayed in the menu display area:
PROGRAM
TOOL
TOOL
DATA
FILE
PAR
EIA/ISO
INPUT
PREVIOUS
NEXT
INFOR.
CANCEL
PAGE
PAGE
START
- The cursor will appear in the upper leftmost parentheses of the WORK NO.
item (data portion ).
[4] Input the data to be loaded.
(1) If the cursor is blinking in the position of the WORK NO. item (data portion
), the message WORK NO.? will be displayed. In that case, specify the
workpiece number of the program to be loaded and then press the input
key
4-91
(2) If the cursor is blinking in the position of the TOOL DATA item (data
portion ), the message CMT I/O <Y:1, N:0>? will be displayed. In that
case, press the
and
keys, in that order, if the tool data is to be
loaded. If the machine has a drum change function, then the four sets of
parentheses correspond to drum No.1, drum No.2, drum No.3, and drum
No.4, respectively, from the left.
(3) The message CMT I/O <Y:1, N:0>? will also be displayed if the cursor is
blinking in the position of the TOOL FILE item (data portion ) or
PARAMETER item (data portion ). In that case, press the
and
keys, in that order, if the tool file data or parameter data is to be

loaded.
(4) If the cursor is blinking in the leftmost parentheses of the position of the
EIA/ISO INFOR item (data portion ), then the message TOOL OFFSET
<Y:1, N:0>? will be displayed. In that case, press the
and
keys, in that order, if the tool offset data is to be loaded. If the cursor is
blinking in the parentheses second from the left, then the message WORK
OFFSET <Y:1, N:0>? will be displayed. In that case, press the
and
keys, in that order, if the work offset data is to be loaded.

If the cursor is blinking in the parentheses third from the left, then the
message MACRO VARIABLE <Y:1, N:0>? will be displayed. In that case,
press the
and
keys, in that order, if the macrovariable(s) is to
be loaded.
If the cursor is blinking in the rightmost parentheses, the message TOOL
LIFE CONTROL <Y:1, N:0>? will be displayed. In that case, press the
and
keys, in that order, if the tool-life control data is to be
loaded.
- For data items that do not need to be loaded, press the appropriate cursor
key to skip to the next item.
- The cursor must be moved in the following order:
WORK NO.
() () () ()
() () () ()
() () ( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
TOOL DATA
TOOL FILE
PARAMETER
EIA/ISO INFOR
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
4-92
- Each time the
or
cursor key is pressed, the cursor moves in
order of ..... ..... .

- If, however, a drum change function (option) is provided in the particular
machine, then the cursor will move in order of .....

- Each time the
..... .
or
cursor key is pressed, the cursor moves in
a reverse order to that mentioned above.

- If the menu key TOOL DATA is pressed, the cursor will jump to the
position of .
- If the menu key TOOL FILE is pressed, the cursor will jump to the
position of .
- If the menu key PAR is pressed, the cursor will jump to the position of .
- If the menu key EIA/ISO INFOR. is pressed, the cursor will jump to the
position of .
- If the menu key PROGRAM is pressed, the cursor will return to the
position of .
- The cursor will continue moving through the position of each data item as
long as data input is made in sequence.
- The input data will be displayed in the parentheses of each item.
(5) Press the menu key START.
- The display status of the START will reverse and data transfer will begin.
- The cursor will blink in the position of the data being transferred.
- After data transfer, the reverse-display status of START will be released.
2. SAVE operation
Proceed as follows to transfer data from the NC equipment to a cassette tape:
[1] Set a cassette tape on the cassette deck.
[2] Call up the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display on the screen.
[3] Press the menu key SAVE NC CMT.
[4] Input the data to be saved.
- To make this input, use a similar procedural step to [4] of LOAD operation
above.
[5] Press the menu key START.
- The display status of START will reverse and data transfer will begin.
4-93
3. COMPARE operation
Proceed as follows to compare the data prestored within the NC equipment and
that recorded on a cassette tape:
[1] Set onto the cassette deck the cassette tape which contains the data to be
compared.
[2] Call the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display on the screen.
[3] Press the menu key COMPARE NC = CMT.
[4] Input the data to be compared.
above.
- The display status of START will reverse and data comparison will begin.
- The cursor will blink in the position of the data being compared.
- When the reverse-display status of START is released, this indicates
coincidence between the two sets of data that have been compared.
- If an error has been found to exist in the data being compared, the alarm
message DATA ARE NOT COINCIDENT will be displayed and the
comparison operation aborted. That is, the data in the position where the
cursor is blinking is different from the data prestored within the NC equipment.
4. Precautions on LOAD, SAVE, and COMPARE operations:
(1) The maximum number of programs that can be transferred at one time is 16.
(2) In the procedural step [4] of a LOAD operation, the alarm message 433 SAME
PROGRAM IS DESIGNATED may be displayed if the same workpiece number
as that prestored within the NC equipment is designated. If this is the case,
then the workpiece number prestored within the NC equipment must be
changed. (See the description of Changing a workpiece number (screen
operation 1.) in PROGRAM FILE display, section 4-4-2.)
However, even if the workpiece number of the program to be loaded agrees
with that of a program existing in the memory of the NC equipment, the alarm
mentioned above will not occur when the value of bit 1 of parameter G9 is 1.
In this case, the corresponding program within the NC equipment will be erased
and the loaded program will be registered under that workpiece number.
Before executing this function, therefore, check if the corresponding program
within the NC equipment is an unnecessary one. (Execution of this function
erases the program within the NC equipment first.)
(3) Data transfer will not be interrupted even if the display is changed over to
another after data transfer has started. Modifying the data being transferred,
however, is not possible.
5. The entire data that has been input can be erased using the following
procedure:
4-94
[1] Press the menu key INPUT CANCEL.

- The message ERASE <INPUT>? will then be displayed.
.
- Values in all parentheses will become 0.
This procedure is therefore useful when re-designating the data to be transferred.
6. How to abort data transfer
Proceed as follows to abort the particular data transfer operation:
[1] Press the menu selector key (green key located to the right of the menu keys)
to display the following menu on the screen:
CMT
DNC
TAPE
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
STOP
- If the DATA IN/OUT display is on the screen, depression of the menu

selector key once or twice causes this menu to present.
[2] Press the menu key I/O STOP.
- The data transfer operation will then be aborted.
If data transfer has been aborted, the transfer operation cannot be restarted from
that program position; it must be restarted from the beginning by repeating the
LOAD, SAVE, or COMPARE operation.
7. DIRECTORY operation
In order to check what type of data is preserved on a cassette tape, the data
can be indicated on the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display. The operating
procedure is described below.
[1] Set onto the cassette deck the cassette tape whose data is to be checked.
[2] Call up the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display on the screen.
[3] Press the menu key DIRECT CMT NC.
- The display status of START will reverse and the data recorded on the
cassette tape will be indicated in parentheses on the display.
- After display of the entire data, the reverse-display status of START will be
released.
4-95
Notes:
1. The maximum number of programs whose contents can be indicated at one
time is 16.
2. A LOAD or COMPARE operation can be carried out after the data recorded on
a cassette tape has been indicated on the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display by a
DIRECTORY operation. Therefore, this method becomes effective especially
when loading or comparing the entire data recorded on a cassette tape.
Example 1:
When loading the entire data that has been indicated on the DATA IN/OUT (CMT)
display by a DIRECTORY operation:
- The entire data being indicated on the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display will then
be transferred to the NC equipment.
Example 2:
When loading a part of the data which has been indicated on the DATA IN/OUT
(CMT) display by a DIRECTORY operation:
[2] Move the cursor to the position in which data that is not to be loaded is being
displayed.
[3] Specify 0 with the appropriate numeric key, and then press the input key

- All data will then be transferred to the NC equipment, with the exception of 0
that has been input in procedural step [2] and [3] above.
Use of a similar procedure to that of example 1 or example 2 above makes it
possible to carry out a COMPARE operation on all or part of the data which is
currently being indicated on the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display.
8. Functions of other menu data
The left half portion of the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display indicates workpiece
numbers and other data of the programs prestored within the NC equipment.
- Pressing the menu key NEXT PAGE changes the current page of the display
in this portion over to the next page.
- Pressing the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE changes the current page of the
display in this portion over to the preceding page.
4-96
- NOTE -
(4-97)
4-9-2
DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display (Option)

Function:
This display is used to transfer the contents of the machining programs or other
various types of data prestored within the NC equipment of the MAZATROL M-32
to a host CPU or external NC equipment, or to read the data prestored within a
host CPU or external NC equipment into the NC equipment of the MAZATROL M32. On this screen, the following operations can be carried out:
1. LOAD
Operation in which data is transferred from a host CPU (or external NC
equipment) to the NC equipment
2. SAVE
Operation in which data is transferred from the NC equipment to a host CPU
(or external NC equipment)
Data of the DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display:
DNC I/O
WORK NO.
9999 M
BLOCK
99999
COMMENT
* *
MODE (********)
WORK NO. (
(
(
)
)
)
)
(
(
(
(
TOOL DATA ( )
)
)
)
)
(
(
(
(
( )
)
)
)
)
(
(
(
(
( )
)
)
)
)
( )
TOOL FILE ( )
PARAMETER ( )
EIA/ISO INFOR ( )
( )
( )
( )
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PAGE 1/16
* * * DATA IN OUT (DNC) * * *
( )
LOAD
SAVE
HOST NC NC HOST
M3S029
Note:
4-98
No.
Data name
Unit
WORK NO.
Description
equipment.
M : MAZATROL program
M or E
BLOCK
: EIA/ISO program

block.
block.
COMMENT
Program name
MODE
Data transfer mode (LOAD or SAVE)
WORK NO.
TOOL DATA
File number of the tool data to be transferred

- For machines not provided with a drum change function, data
can be input only in the leftmost parentheses.
TOOL FILE
File number of the tool file data to be transferred
PARAMETER
File number of the parameter(s) to be transferred
EIA/ISO INFOR
File number of each set of data related to EIA/ISO information

- In the leftmost parentheses:
File number of the tool offset data to be transferred.
- In the parentheses second from the left:
File number of the work offset data to be transferred.
- In the parentheses third from the left:
File number of the macrovariable(s) to be transferred.
- In the rightmost parentheses:
File number of the tool-life control data to be transferred.
The message M2 PROGRAM BEING READ ? is displayed in

this position while the NC equipment is reading the M1 or M2
program.
Display operations:
1. LOAD operation
Proceed as follows to transfer data from a host CPU (or external NC
equipment) to the NC equipment:
[1] Call up the DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display on the screen.
LOAD
SAVE
HOST NC NCHOST
4-99
[2] Press the menu key LOAD HOST NC.

).
- The following menu will be displayed in the menu display area:
PROGRAM
TOOL
TOOL
DATA
FILE
PAR
EIA/ISO
INPUT
PREVIOUS
NEXT
INFOR.
CANCEL
PAGE
PAGE
START
item (data portion ).
[3] Input the data to be loaded.
(1) If the cursor is blinking in the position of the WORK NO. item (data portion
), the message WORK PIECE PROGRAM NUMBER? will be displayed.
In that case, specify the workpiece number of the program to be loaded
and then press the input key
(2) If the cursor is blinking in the position of either the TOOL DATA item (data
portion ), TOOL FILE item (data portion ), or PARAMETER item (data
portion ), then the message FILE NO.? will be displayed. In that case,
specify the file number of the data to be loaded and then press the input
key
(3) If the cursor is blinking in the leftmost parentheses of the position of the
EIA/ISO INFOR item (data portion ), then the message TOOL OFFSET
FILE NO.? will be displayed. In that case, if the tool offset data is to be
loaded, specify the corresponding file number with the appropriate numeric
key(s) and then press the input key
If the cursor is blinking in the parentheses second from the left, then the
message WORK OFFSET FILE NO.? will be displayed. In that case, if the
work offset data is to be loaded, specify the corresponding file number with
the appropriate numeric key(s) and then press the input key
If the cursor is blinking in the parentheses third from the left, then the
message MACRO VARIABLE FILE NO.? will be displayed. In that case, if
the macrovariable(s) is to be loaded, specify the corresponding file number
with appropriate numeric key(s) and press the input key
If the cursor is blinking in the rightmost parentheses, then the message

TOOL LIFE CONTROL FILE NO.? will be displayed. In that case, if the
tool-life control data is to be loaded, specify the corresponding file number
with appropriate numeric key(s) and then press the input key
.
4-100
- The input workpiece number or file number will be displayed in the position
where the cursor was blinking.
- For details of the cursor movement procedure, see the description of LOAD
operation (screen operation 1.) in section 4-9-1 DATA IN/OUT (CMT)
display.
- The cursor will automatically move to the next data item as long as data input
is made in sequence.
2. SAVE operation
Proceed as follows to transfer data from the NC equipment to a host CPU (or
external NC equipment):
[1] Call up the DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display on the screen.
[2] Press the menu key SAVE NC HOST.
[3] Input the data to be saved.
above.
-The cursor will blink in the position of the data being transferred.
3. Precautions on LOAD and SAVE operations:
(1) The maximum number of programs whose contents can be transferred at one
time is 16. However, a larger volume of data than the memory capacity of the
source device cannot be transferred.
(2) If the programs to be transferred include programs whose workpiece numbers
overlap those of the program prestored within the memory of the destination
device, then such programs cannot be transferred. In such cases, change the
workpiece number of the program prestored within the memory of either one of
the two devices. (See the description of screen operation 1. in section 4-4-2
PROGRAM FILE display.)
Similarly, if the data to be transferred includes values that are assigned the
same file number as the data prestored within the memory of the destination
device, then those values cannot be transferred.
4-101
(3) If the entire data that has been input in procedural step [3] of a LOAD or SAVE
operation is to be erased, first press the menu key INPUT CANCEL and then
press the input key
. All the input values will then become 0.
(4) Data transfer still continues to be performed through to completion even if the
DATA IN/OUT display has been changed over to another display during
execution of the data transfer operation. However, the data being transferred
cannot be overridden with new data.
(5) If the data transfer operation being performed is to be aborted, press the menu
key I/O STOP. For further details, see the description of How to abort data
transfer in section 4-9-1 DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display.
If data transfer has been aborted, the transfer operation cannot be restarted
from that program position; it must be restarted from the beginning, irrespective
of whether the particular operation is LOAD or SAVE. In addition, when data
transfer is currently in progress under commands from external equipment, the
transfer operation cannot be aborted even if the menu key I/O STOP is
pressed.
(6) Pressing the menu key NEXT PAGE causes the current page of the display in
the left half portion of the screen (workpiece numbers and other data prestored
within the NC equipment are displayed in this portion) to change over to the
next page.
Pressing the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE causes the current page to change
back to the preceding page.
4-9-3
DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display

Function:
This display is used to preserve the EIA/ISO programs prestored within the NC
equipment onto paper tape or to read the EIA/ISO programs previously punched on
paper tape into the NC equipment.
On this display, the following operations can be carried out:
1. LOAD
Operation in which a program punched on paper tape is transferred to the NC
equipment
2. ALL LOAD
Operation in which all the programs punched on paper tape are transferred to
the NC equipment
3. PUNCH
Operation in which a program prestored within the NC equipment is output onto
paper tape
4-102
4. ALL PUNCH
Operation in which all the programs prestored within the NC equipment are
output onto paper tape
5. COMPARE
Operation in which comparison is made between a program prestored within
the NC equipment and a program punched on paper tape
6. ALL COMPARE
Operation in which comparison is made between all the programs prestored
within the NC equipment and all those punched on paper tape
7. TAPE SEARCH
Operation in which the data punched on paper tape is searched for a specific
character string(s)
8. REWIND (Option)
Operation in which paper tape is rewound
Note:
Data that can be transferred using this display is that of the EIA/ISO programs only.
4-103
TAPE I/O
WORK NO.
9999 M
BLOCK
99999
COMMENT
* *
MODE (********)
WORK NO. (
(
(
)
)
)
)
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
TAPE
SEARCH DATA
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Data of the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display:
PAGE 1/16
* * * DATA IN OUT (TAPE) * * *

( )
LOAD
TAPENC
ALL LOAD
TAPENC
PUNCH
ALL PUNCH
NC TAPE NC TAPE
COMPARE
NC=TAPE
ALL COM.
NC=TAPE
TAPE
SEARCH
REWIND
M3S030
Note:
No.
Data name
WORK NO.
Unit
Description
equipment
M or E

M : MAZATROL program
E
BLOCK
: EIA/ISO program

block.
block.
COMMENT
MODE
Program name
Data transfer mode (LOAD, ALL LOAD, PUNCH, ALL PUNCH,
COMPARE, ALL COMPARE, TAPE SEARCH, or REWIND)
WORK NO.
TAPE
Data that has been searched for by the NC equipment in the

TAPE SEARCH mode will be displayed in this position.
SEARCH DATA
The data to be searched for in the TAPE SEARCH mode will be

displayed in this position.
4-104
Display operations:
1. LOAD operation
Proceed as follows to transfer an EIA/ISO program punched on paper tape to
the NC equipment:
[1] Set onto the paper tape reader the paper tape containing the program to be
loaded.
[2] Call the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display on the screen.
LOAD
ALL LOAD
PUNCH
ALL PUNCH COMPARE ALL COM.
TAPE NC TAPENC NCTAPE NCTAPE NC=TAPE
NC=TAPE
TAPE
REWIND
SEARCH
[3] Press the menu key LOAD TAPE NC.

).
- The following manu will be displayed in the menu display area:

INPUT
PREVIOUS
NEXT
CANCEL
PAGE
PAGE
START
item (data portion ), then the message WORK PIECE PROGRAM
NUMBER.? will be displayed.
program to be loaded. Then, press the input key
- The input workpiece number will be displayed and the cursor will move into
the next parentheses (on the right) of that item.
- Likewise, input the workpiece numbers of all the programs to be loaded.
Example:
When loading the programs having workpiece number 10, 11, and 12:
Press the
, and

- Up to 16 workpiece numbers can be input.
- It is not possible to input the same workpiece number as that prestored within
the NC equipment. If a program with the same workpiece number as that
prestored within the NC equipment is to be loaded, then the corresponding
workpiece number prestored within the memory of the NC equipment must be
changed. (For details of the changing procedure, see the description of
screen operation 1. in section 4-4-2 PROGRAM FILE display.)
4-105

- The cursor will blink in the position of the workpiece number of the program
being transferred.
2. ALL LOAD operation
Proceed as follows to transfer all EIA/ISO programs punched on paper tape to
the NC equipment:
[1] Set onto the paper tape reader the paper tape containing the programs to be
loaded.
[2] Call up the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display on the screen.
[3] Press the menu key ALL LOAD TAPE NC.
- The display status of START will be reversed and data transfer will begin.
3. PUNCH operation
Proceed as follows to output an EIA/ISO program prestored within the NC
equipment onto paper tape:
[1] Set paper tape onto the tape puncher.
[2] Call the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display on the screen.
[3] Press the menu key PUNCH NC TAPE.
program to be output. Then, press the input key
- Likewise, input the workpiece numbers of all the programs to be output.
- The display status of START will be reversed and the tape puncher will be
operated.
whose contents are currently being punched.
- After punching of specified program, the reverse-display status of START will
be released.
4-106
4. ALL PUNCH operation

Proceed as follows to output all EIA/ISO programs prestored within the NC
equipment onto paper tape:
[1] Set paper tape onto the tape puncher.
[3] Press the menu key ALL PUNCH NC TAPE.
operated.
- After punching of all the programs, the reverse-display status of START will
be released.
5. COMPARE operation
Proceed as follows to compare the contents of an EIA/ISO program prestored
within the NC equipment and those of a program recorded on paper tape:
[1] Set onto the paper tape reader the paper tape which contains the program to
be compared.
[3] Press the menu key COMPARE NC=TAPE.
program to be compared. Then, press the input key
- Likewise, input the workpiece numbers of all the programs to be compared.
- The display status of START will reverse and comparison between the
specified program (program prestored within the memory of the NC
equipment) and the program recorded on paper tape will begin.
being compared.
coincidence in contents between the two programs that have been compared.
4-107
- If, during this comparison, the two programs are found not to be coincident in
contents, the alarm message DATA ARE NOT COINCIDENT will be
displayed and the comparison operation will be aborted.
6. ALL COMPARE operation
Proceed as follows to compare in contents all the EIA/ISO programs prestored
within the NC equipment and all those recorded on paper tape:
[1] Set onto the paper tape reader the paper tape which contains the programs to
be compared.
[3] Press the menu key ALL COM. NC=TAPE.
- The display status of START will be reversed, and comparison between all
EIA/ISO programs prestored within the memory of the NC equipment and all
those recorded on paper tape will begin.
coincidence in contents between all the EIA/ISO programs prestored within
the NC equipment and all those recorded on paper tape that have been
compared.
- If, during this comparison, the programs are found not to be coincident in
contents, the alarm message DATA ARE NOT COINCIDENT will be
displayed and the comparison operation will be aborted.
7. Precautions on data transfer
(1) To erase all workpiece numbers that have been input in procedural step [4] of
a LOAD, PUNCH, or COMPARE operation, first press the menu key INPUT
CANCEL and then press the input key
. With this method, it becomes
possible to restart a workpiece-number input procedure from the beginning.

(2) Data transfer still continues to be performed through to completion even if the
DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display has been changed over to another display
during execution of the data transfer operation. However, the data being
transferred cannot be overridden with new data.
(3) To abort data transfer, press the menu key I/O STOP. If the DATA IN/OUT
(TAPE) display is on the screen, depression of the menu selector key (green
key located to the right of the menu keys) once or twice will cause I/O STOP
to be displayed at the right corner of the menu display area.
If data transfer has been aborted, the transfer operation cannot be restarted
from that program position; it must be restarted from the beginning, irrespective
of the type of operation (LOAD, ALL LOAD, PUNCH, ALL PUNCH, COMPARE,
or ALL COMPARE).
4-108
(4) The left half portion of the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display indicates workpiece
numbers and other data of the programs prestored within the NC equipment.
Pressing the menu key NEXT PAGE changes the current page of the display in
this portion over to the next page.
Pressing the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE changes the current page of the
display in this portion over to the preceding page.
(5) During step [4] of LOAD operation, when the value of bit 1 of parameter G9 is
1, alarm will not occur even if the workpiece number of the program to be
loaded agrees with that of a program existing in the memory of the NC
equipment. In this case, the corresponding program within the NC equipment
will be erased and the loaded program will be registered under that workpiece
number. Before executing this function, therefore, check if the corresponding
program within the NC equipment is an unnecessary one. (Execution of this
function erases the program within the NC equipment first.)
(6) During ALL LOAD operation, the alarm message 536 SAME PROGRAM
APPOINT may be displayed if the same workpiece number as that prestored
within the NC equipment is designated. If this is the case, then the workpiece
number prestored within the NC equipment must be changed. (See the
description of Changing a workpiece number (screen operation 1.) in
PROGRAM FILE display, section 4-4-2.)
However, even if the work number of the program to be loaded agrees with that
of a program existing in the memory of the NC equipment, the alarm mentioned
above will not occur when the value of bit 1 of parameter G9 is 1. In this case,
the corresponding program within the NC equipment will be erased and the
loaded program will be registered under that workpiece number. Before
executing this function, therefore, check if the corresponding program within
the NC equipment is an unnecessary one. (Execution of this function erases
the program within the NC equipment first).
8. TAPE SEARCH operation

A specific character string(s) can be located from among the data recorded on
paper tape by carrying out the procedural steps described below.
[1] Set onto the paper tape reader the paper tape which contains the character
string(s) to be searched for.
4-109
[3] Press the menu key TAPE SEARCH.

G
SP
EOB
SHIFT
.......
- Each time the menu key SHIFT is pressed, the menu display changes in
order of
..... as shown below.
N
SHIFT
SHIFT
INS
SHIFT
.......
.......
.......
- The message SEARCH DATA <START>? will be displayed.

[4] Select the necessary characters from menus
through
, and using the
appropriate menu key and numeric keys, specify the character string(s) to be
searched for.
Example:
When searching for the character string X100:
Press X,
, and
, in that order.
Numeric keys
Menu key
- The specified character string will then be displayed in the position of the
SEARCH DATA item (data portion ).
- To cancel the entire character string, press the data cancellation key
- To cancel only the last character that has been specified, press the clear key
.
SET
MACRO
END
INPUT
Note:
In procedural step [4] above, press the menu key MACRO INPUT if a
character string for macrovariable input is to be located.
4-110
[6] Press the menu key SET END.

INPUT
PREVIOUS
NEXT
CANCEL
PAGE
PAGE
START

- This will cause the display status of [START] to reverse and the NC
equipment to start searching the paper tape for the character string which has
been specified in procedural step [4] above.
- If the corresponding character string is found, then the data containing that
character string will be displayed in the position of the TAPE item (data
portion ). At the same time, the reverse-display status of START will be
released.
Example:
If the character string X100 is found:
TAPE:
G01X100.Y100.F10;
SEARCH DATA: X100
- If the corresponding character string is not found, then the alarm message
559 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed.
9. REWIND operation (Option)
Use the following procedure to rewind paper tape:
[1] Press the menu selector key (green key located to the right of the menu keys)
to display the following menu on the screen:
LOAD
ALL LOAD
PUNCH
ALL PUNCH COMPARE ALL COM.
TAPENC TAPENC NCTAPE NCTAPE NC=TAPE
NC=TAPE
TAPE
REWIND
SEARCH
- If this menu is already on the display, the menu selector key does not need to
be pressed.
[2] Press the menu key REWIND.
INPUT
PREVIOUS
NEXT
CANCEL
PAGE
PAGE
START

- This will cause the display status of START to reverse and the paper tape
rewind operation to begin.
- After the paper tape rewind operation has been completed, the reversedisplay status of START will be released.
4-111
4-10
EIA/ISO INFOR Display

Function:
The EIA/ISO INFOR display should be called up on the screen when registering
the various types of data necessary for EIA/ISO program execution.
The EIA/ISO INFOR display consists of the following four displays:
1. TOOL OFFSET DATA display
The tool-data compensation that corresponds to each of the tools to be used
can be registered on this display.
2. WORK OFFSET DATA display
The workpiece coordinate system to be used for an EIA/ISO program can be
set on this display.
3. MACRO VARIABLE display
The common and/or local variables to be used for a user macroprogram can be
registered on this display.
4. TOOL LIFE INDEX display
The necessary data to control the tools to be used can be registered on this
display.
Procedure for calling up each display:
The following menu will be indicated when the display selector key (green key
located to the left of the menu keys) is pressed twice in succession:
EIA/ISO
MODAL
INFORM.
INFORM.
ALARM
PROCESS
HARD
CONTROL
COPY
Here, pressing the menu key EIA/ISO INFORM. causes the following menu to
display:
TOOL
WORK
MACRO
TOOL
OFFSET
OFFSET
VARIABLE
LIFE
- If the menu key TOOL OFFSET is pressed, the TOOL OFFSET DATA display
will be indicated.
- If the menu key WORK OFFSET is pressed, the WORK OFFSET DATA display
will be indicated.
- If the menu key MACRO VARIABLE is pressed, the MACRO VARIABLE display
will be indicated. (The MACRO VARIABLE display consists of four subdisplays.
See section 4-10-3 MACRO VARIABLE display, for details of the individual
subdisplay calling procedures.)
- If the menu key TOOL LIFE is pressed, the TOOL LIFE INDEX display will be
indicated.
4-112
Note:
The individual data that has been registered on the EIA/ISO INFOR display is not
effective for MAZATROL programs.
4-10-1
TOOL OFFSET DATA display

Function:
This display should be called up on the screen when setting the amount of tooldiameter or tool-position compensation of each tool to be used on an EIA/ISO
program. The TOOL OFFSET DATA display is divided into type A or type B,
depending on the model of machine being used.
DATA of the TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE A) display:
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OFFSET
99999.999
NO.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
OFFSET
99999.999
NO.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
OFFSET
99999.999
NO.
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
OFFSET
99999.999
POSITION
X 99999.999
Y
Z
4
MACHINE
X 99999.999
Y
Z
4
PAGE 1/
* * * TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE A) * * *
TEACH
INCR.
POSITION
ALL
TOOL
PREVIOUS
NEXT
SET
ERASE
LIFE
PAGE
PAGE
M3S031
Notes:
No.
Data name
Data name
OFFSET
POSITION
Unit
Description
mm (inch)
Amount of tool compensation
X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
Current position of the tool tip in the workpiece coordinate
Degrees ( ) or mm
system
(inch)
MACHINE
MACHINE
X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
Current position of the point at which the centerline and end-face
Degrees ( ) or mm
of the spindle intersect in the machine coordinate system
(inch)
4-113
DATA of the TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE B) display:
SHAPE CORR.
99999.999
DEFACE CORR.
99.999
POSITION
X 99999.999
Y
Z
4
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
DEFACE CORR.
99.999
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
SHAPE CORR.
99999.999
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
MACHINE
X 99999.999
Y
Z
4
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TOOL DIAMETER
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
TOOL LENGTH
PAGE 1/
* * * TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE B) * * *

TEACH
INCR.
POSITION
SET
ALL
ERASE
TOOL
LIFE
PREVIOUS
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE
M3S032
Notes:
No.
Data name
TOOL LENGTH
Unit
Description
mm (inch)
Amount of figure compensation for tool length
mm (inch)
Amount of defacement compensation for tool length
SHAPE CORR.
TOOL LENGTH
DEFACE CORR.
TOOL DIAMETER
SHAPE CORR.
mm (inch)
Amount of figure compensation for tool diameter
TOOL DIAMETER
DEFACE CORR.
mm (inch)
Amount of defacement compensation for tool diameter
POSITION
POSITION
X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
Degrees ( ) or mm
(inch)
Current position of the tool tip in the workpiece coordinate

system
X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
Degrees ( ) or mm
(inch)
MACHINE
MACHINE
4-114
Display operations:
1. Tool-compensation data setting procedures
Use the following procedures to input data to the OFFSET item (data portion
) of the TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE A) display or the SHAPE CORR. and
DEFACE CORR. items (data portions , , and ) of the TOOL OFFSET
DATA (TYPE B) display:
(1) Manual setting procedure
Assume that the TOOL OFFSET DATA display (type A or B) is already on the
screen.
[1] First, press the cursor key (
, or
) to call up the cursor
on the screen.
- If the key
or
is pressed, the cursor will appear in the upper left
corner of the screen.

- If the key
or
is pressed, the cursor will appear in the lower right
corner of the screen.

[2] Press the appropriate cursor key to move the cursor to the position in which
data is to be input.
[3] Specify the desired data with appropriate numeric key(s), and then press the
input key
- The input data will then be displayed in the position where the cursor was
blinking.
(2) Automatic setting procedure
Using the TEACH function of the display, tool-length compensation data can be
automatically input to the OFFSET item (data portion ) of the TOOL OFFSET
DATA (TYPE A) display or the TOOL LENGTH-SHAPE CORR. item (data
portion ) of the TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE B) display.
[1] Move the spindle by hand and bring the tool tip into contact with the top
surface of either the reference block or the workpiece of a predetermined
height.
- See the Operating manual for machine.
[2] Call the TOOL OFFSET DATA display on the screen.
TEACH
INCR.
POSITION ALL ERASE TOOL LIFE PREVIOUS

SET
4-115
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE
[3] After the cursor appears on the screen, move it to the position of the OFFSET
item (in the case of type A) or TOOL LENGTH-SHAPE CORR. item (in the
case of type B).
- For details of cursor calling, see the description of step [1] of the Manual
setting procedure above.
[4] Press the menu key TEACH.
- This will cause the display status of TEACH to reverse and the message
DIST. FROM TABLE SURF. TO TEETH <INPUT>? to present.
[5] Specify the height of either the reference block or the workpiece using the
appropriate numeric key(s), and then press the input key
- The NC equipment will then calculate the tool length, and the calculated value
will be automatically set under OFFSET item (in the case of type A) or TOOL
LENGTH-SHAPE CORR. item (in the case of type B). (See the figure below.)
Machine zero-point
Distance
from the
machine
zero-point
to the
currect
position of
the
machine
Procedural step [1]
Currect position
of the machine
Distance from
the table surface
to the tool tip
a
aa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
aa
aa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Tool length
Distance
from the
machine
zero-point
to the
table
surface
(constant)
Reference block
or workpiece
Table
M3S022
Since the current position of the machine is placed in the memory of the NC
equipment, it will calculate the length of the tool if the height of the reference
block or workpiece (i.e., the distance from the table surface to the tool tip) is
specified.
- The reverse-display status of TEACH will be released automatically.
4-116
2. Re-setting the current position

The current position of the tool tip in the workpiece coordinate system will be
displayed in the position of POSITION item.
In the description given below, assume that the TOOL OFFSET DATA display
(type A or B) is already on the screen.
[1] Press the menu key POSITION SET.
- This will cause the display status of POSITION SET to reverse and the
cursor to appear in the position of X item.
- In addition, the message X POSITION DISPLAY SET? will be displayed.
[2] Specify new X-axis coordinates with the appropriate numeric keys, and then
press the input key
- The new coordinate values will then be displayed and the cursor will move to
the position of Y item.
- In addition, the message Y POSITION DISPLAY SET? will be displayed.
[3] Specify new Y-axis coordinates with the appropriate numeric keys, and then
press the input key
[4] Similarly, specify new Z-axis coordinates and then press the input key
- If an additional (fourth) axis is provided, a similar operation to the above is to

be carried out for the fourth axis.
- If re-setting is not to be done, just press the input key
only.
- After new coordinate values for all the axes have been input, the reversedisplay status of POSITION SET will be released and the cursor will
disappear.
3. Functions and usage of other menu items
When the TOOL OFFSET DATA display (type A or B) is called up on the
screen, the following menu will be displayed in the menu display area:
TEACH
INCR.
POSITION ALL ERASE TOOL LIFE PREVIOUS

SET
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE
Of these menu items, TEACH and POSITION SET have been described in the
subsections of screen operations 1. and 2. above.
(1) INCR.
If the menu key INCR. is pressed, the numeric data that has already been set
can be updated just by setting an increment (or decrement) for the data.
For further details, see the description of screen operations 5.-(1), INCR., that
is given in TOOL DATA Display (section 4-6).
4-117
(2) ALL ERASE

If the menu key ALL ERASE is pressed, it becomes possible to erase the
individual tool-compensation values at one time (in type A, the entire data that
has been registered in data item ; in type B, the entire data that has been
registered in data item through ).
The operating procedure is as follows:
[1] Press the menu key ALL ERASE.
- This will cause the display status of the ALL ERASE menu to reverse and the
message ALL ERASE < 9999 INPUT>? to display.
[2] Specify 9999 with the numeric keys and then press the input key
- This will cause all the registered tool-compensation values to erase.

- In addition, the reverse-display status of ALL ERASE will be released.
(3) PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE
If the menu key NEXT PAGE is pressed, the display will change over to the
next page of that display.
If the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE is pressed, the display will change back to
the preceding page of that display.
(4) TOOL LIFE
If the menu key TOOL LIFE is pressed, the TOOL LIFE INDEX display will be
indicated.
4-10-2
WORK OFFSET DATA display

Function:
This display should be called on the screen when setting the workpiece coordinate
system (G54 to G59) that is to be used under an EIA/ISO program.
4-118
DATA of the WORK OFFSET DATA display:
G54
G56
G58
SHIFT
G65
G57
G59
MACHINE
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
X 99999.999
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
X 99999.999
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
X 99999.999
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
X 99999.999
X 99999.999
X 99999.999
X 99999.999
X 99999.999
* * * WORK OFFSET DATA * * *

TEACH
INCR.
M3S034
Notes:
Data name
No.
G54
G54
Unit
Description
X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
Coordinate values of the G54 workpiece zero-point in the
Degrees ( ) or mm (in.)
machine coordinate system
X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
X, Y, Z
mm (inch)

G57
G57
X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
G54
G58
X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
Shift amounts of the G54 to G59 workpiece zero-point

coordinate values.
G57
MACHINE
X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
G55
G55
G56
G56
G55
G59
G56
SHIFT

4-119
Display operations:
The procedures for setting workpiece zero-point coordinate values are described
below.
Use of the TEACH function of the display makes it possible to automatically set the
coordinate values, in the machine coordinate system, of the zero-point of each
workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59) that is to be used under an EIA/ISO
program.
The operating procedures are as follows:
1. Setting X-Coordinate values
[1] Manually move the X-axis until the tool comes into contact with the workpiece
or reference block.
Example:
If the workpiece zero-point is at the position shown below:
Coordinate
position
Machine zero-point
Workpiece zero-point
Procedural
step [1]
+Z
Workpiece
+X
5
Distance to the work zero-point

(Radius of the tool)
M3S035
- See the Operating manual for machine for details of axis movement.
[2] Call up the WORK OFFSET DATA display on the screen.
TEACH
INCR.
[3] Call up the cursor on the screen, and then move it to the position of X in the
workpiece coordinate system to be set.
- If the cursor key
or
is pressed, the cursor will appear in the
position of X of the G54 item.

- If the cursor key
or
is pressed, the cursor will appear in the
position of 4 of the G59 item.
4-120
[4] Press the menu key TEACH.

- This will cause the display status of TEACH to reverse and the message
EDGE CENTER POSITION IN WORK? to present.
[5] Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the distance from the centerline
of the tool (coordinate position) to the workpiece zero-point. Then, press the
input key
- Normally, the radius of the tool is to be input. In the example shown above,
however, the radius must be input with a plus sign because the workpiece
zero-point is in the plus direction from the coordinate position. That is, press
the
and
- The NC equipment will then calculate the X-coordinate values of the

workpiece zero-point in the machine coordinate system, and the calculated
values will be automatically set in the position where the cursor was blinking.
- Subsequently, the reverse-display status of TEACH will be released.
2. Setting Y-coordinate values and Z-coordinate values
The Y-coordinate values and Z-coordinate values can be automatically set
using a similar procedure to that mentioned above.
For the Z-axis, however, the distance from the tool tip to the workpiece zeropoint is to be set in procedural step [5].
Note:
Use of INCR. allows the coordinate values of the workpiece zero-point already
registered to be changed simply by setting an increment (or decrement). For
further details, see the description of INCR. (screen operation 5.-(1)) that is
given in section 4-6 TOOL DATA Display.
4-121
4-10-3
MACRO VARIABLE display

Function:
This display should be called on the screen when setting data for the macro
variable(s) that is to be used in a user macro program.
There are two types of macro variables: common variables that can be used in
common to the main program and macro programs called from it, and local
variables that can be used only in macro programs.
The MACRO VARIABLE display consists of the following four sections:
1. COMMON VARIABLE display
The common variables that have been set on this display are used when
executing a user macro program in the automatic-operation mode.
2. COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) display
The common variables that have been set on this display are used when
carrying out a tool-path check.
3. LOCAL VARIABLE display
The local variables that have been set on this display are used when executing
a user macro program in the automatic-operation mode.
4. LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) display
The local variables that have been set on this display are used when carrying
out a tool-path check.
Note:
The LOCAL VARIABLE display and the LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) display
present an indication of the variables that have been set thereon; neither display
allows variables to be changed.
For details of user macro programs, refer to the separate EIA/ISO Programming
manual.
Procedure for calling up each display:
When the MACRO VARIABLE display is called up on the screen, the COMMON
VARIABLE display will be indicated automatically.
In the menu display area, the following menu will be displayed:
COMMON
COMMON
LOCAL
LOCAL
VARIABLE
CHECK
VARIABLE
CHECK
EXP
NEXT
PAGE
- If the menu key COMMON CHECK is pressed, the current display will change
over to the COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) display.
- If the menu key LOCAL VARIABLE is pressed, the current display will change
over to the LOCAL VARIABLE display.
- If the menu key LOCAL CHECK is pressed, the current display will change over
to the LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) display.
- If the menu key COMMON VARIABLE is pressed, the current display will change
over to the COMMON VARIABLE display.
4-122
Data of the COMMON VARIABLE display:

NO.
DATA
NO.
DATA
NO.
DATA
NO.
#100
#101
#102
#113
#114
#115
#126
#127
#128
#139
#140
#141
#103
#104
#105
#116
#117
#118
#129
#130
#131
#142
#143
#144
#106
#107
#108
#119
#120
#121
#132
#133
#134
#145
#146
#147
#109
#110
#111
#122
#123
#124
#135
#136
#137
#148
#149
#112
#125
#138
DATA
* * * COMMON VARIABLE * * *
COMMON
VARIABLE
COMMON
CHECK
LOCAL
VARIABLE
LOCAL
CHECK
EXP
NEXT
PAGE
M3S036
No.
Data name
Unit
Description
NO.
Variable identification number
DATA
Variable that has been registered
4-123
Data of the LOCAL VARIABLE display:

NO.
DATA
NO.
DATA
NO.
DATA
NO.
#1
#2
#3
#9
#10
#11
#17
#18
#19
#25
#26
#27
#4
#5
#6
#12
#13
#14
#20
#21
#22
#28
#29
#30
#7
#8
#15
#16
#23
#24
#31
#32
DATA
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
NEST ( )
* * * LOCAL VARIABLE * * *
COMMON
VARIABLE
COMMON
CHECK
LOCAL
VARIABLE
LOCAL
CHECK
EXP
NEXT
PAGE
M3S037
No.
Data name
Unit
Description
NO.
Variable identification number
DATA
Variable that has been registered
NEST ( )
Nesting number
Display operations:
Variables registering procedure:
Proceed as follows to input variables on the COMMON VARIABLE display or
COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) display:
[1] First, call the cursor on the screen by pressing one of the following four cursor
keys:
- If the cursor key
or
is pressed, the cursor will appear at the upper
left corner of the screen.

- If the cursor key
or
is pressed, the cursor will appear at the lower
right corner of the screen.
4-124
[2] Press the appropriate cursor key to move the cursor to the NO. item of the
variable to be input.
[3] Specify the desired variable with the appropriate numeric key(s), and then
press the input key
Notes:
1. Pressing the menu key EXP allows data to be input in exponential form.
Example:
If 2 10 6 is to be input:
Press the
, EXP,
, and
2. Pressing the menu key NEXT PAGE causes the current page of the display to
change over to the next page.
In addition, if the menu key NEXT PAGE is pressed while the LOCAL
VARIABLE or LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) display remains on the screen,
then the number in the NEST item (data portion ) will change over to the
next serial number and the current page of the display will also change over to
the next page.
4-125
4-10-4
TOOL LIFE INDEX display

Function:
- The TOOL LIFE INDEX display should be made to be shown on the screen when
setting the data necessary for the filing of tool information used with the desired
EIA/ISO program (including spare-tool information).
- After this display has been shown, the tool information to be used with the
particular EIA/ISO program can be registered or deleted.
Data of the TOOL LIFE INDEX display:
H. NO.
512
D NO
512
OFFSET H
9999.999
OFFSET D
9999.999
LIFE (M)
9999
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TIME (M)
9999
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
TNO. GROUP NO.

1
99999999
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PAGE 1/
* * * TOOL LIFE INDEX * * *
( )
INCR.
TOOL
ALL
TOOL
PREVIOUS
NEXT
ERASE
ERASE
OFFSET
PAGE
PAGE
M3S038
Note:
No.
Data name
Unit
Description
TNO.
Tool number
GROUP NO.
Tool group number (The same group number is assigned to

each of the tools which are of the same shape and dimensions.
That is, a particular tool and its spare tool will have the same
group number.)
H.NO.
Tool-length compensation number (see Note 1)
D NO.
OFFSET H
Tool-diameter compensation number (see Note 2)

mm (inch)
Tool-length compensation value (see Note 1)
OFFSET D
mm (inch)
Tool-diameter compensation value (see Note 2)
LIFE (M)
minute
Tool life
TIME (M)
minute
Tool operation time
4-126
Notes:
1. Either a tool-length compensation number or a tool-length compensation value
can be set for one tool.
2. Either a tool-diameter compensation number or a tool-diameter compensation
value can be set for one tool.
Display operations:
The TOOL LIFE INDEX display is used to set three types of data: tool group
numbers, tool compensation data, and tool-life control data.
1. Setting tool group numbers
[1] Call up the cursor on the screen by pressing the cursor key
- If the key
or
is pressed, the cursor will appear in the uppermost position of
the GROUP NO. item on the screen.

- If the key
is pressed, the cursor will appear in the lowermost position of
the GROUP NO. item on the screen.
[2] Press the cursor key
or
to move the cursor to the GROUP NO.
item line on which data is to be set.

- The message SAME TOOL GROUP NO.? will then be displayed.
[3] Input a tool group number and then press the input key
- Any number from 0 to 99999999 can be input as a tool group number.

However, if the particular tool has the same shape and same dimensions as
those of a tool already registered, then the same group number must be input
to register the former tool as a spare for the latter.
- The input number will be displayed on the selected line of the GROUP NO.
item.
After each of the tools to be used with an EIA/ISO program has been assigned a
group number in this manner, the spare tool to be next used is automatically
selected from among the tools assigned the same group number. There are two
methods of spare-tool selection, as described below. Thus, one of the two methods
must be specified before automatic spare-tool selection can be executed.
4-127
(1) Selection in order of tool registration number (when 0 is set in bit 5 of

parameter F94):
If 0 is set in bit 5 of parameter F94 which appears on the USER PARAMETER
NO.1 display, tools that have neither reached their lives nor have become
damaged will be automatically selected in descending order of tool number
from among the tools assigned the same group number. (If all the tools with the
same group number have reached their lives or have become damaged, then
the tool with the largest tool number among all those tools that have reached
their lives will be selected. Or, if all the tools with the same group number have
become damaged, then the tool with the largest tool number will be selected.)
(2) Selection in order of length of life (when 1 is set in bit 5 of parameter F94):
If 1 is set in bit 5 of parameter F94 which appears on the USER PARAMETER
NO.1 display, the tool that has the least operation time will be automatically
selected from among the tools assigned the same group number. If there are
two or more tools that have the same operation time, the tool with the smallest
tool number among those tools will be selected. (If all tools with the same
group number have reached their lives or have become damaged, then the tool
with the largest tool number among all those tools that have reached their lives
will be selected. Or, if all the tools with the same group number have become
damaged, then the tool with the largest tool number will be selected.)
In addition, there are two methods of setting tool numbers during use of a
programgroup number setting and individual tool number setting. These two
methods of tool number setting are described in detail below, together with the toollife filing and spare-tool changing manners.
(1) Designation by means of the group number (when bit 4 of parameter F94 is set
to 0):
When 0 is entered in bit 4 of parameter F94 displayed on the USER
PARAMETER NO. 1 display, the command number T in the program will be
considered as the group number and the spare tool will be selected according
to the group number recorded on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display. (If there are
several tools with the same group number, the spare tool will be selected
according to the selection types mentioned above.)
(2) Designation by means of the tool number (when bit 4 of parameter F94 is set
to 1):
When 1 is entered in bit 4 of parameter F94 displayed on the USER
PARAMETER NO. 1 display, the command number T in the program will be
considered as the tool number and the spare tool will be selected accroding to
the tool number recorded on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display. (If there are
several tools with the same group number, the spare tool will be selected
according to the selection types mentioned above.)
4-128
Example 1:
Group number setting
Program
T01
T0M06;
Tool command

TNO
1
GROUP NO.
2
2
3
4
1
1
2
H.NO.
D NO.
OFFSET H
OFFSET D
LIFE (M)
0
TIME (M)
0
60
60
0
61
0
0
Tool command number T01 that has been specified in the program is handled
as GROUP NO.1, and an automatic search is made for the TNOs to which
GROUP NO.1 has been assigned on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display. In the
example shown in the diagram above, there are two such TNOsTNO.2 and
TNO.3. However, since TNO.2 is for the tool that has reached its life, TNO.3
will be selected.
Example 2:
Individual tool number setting
Program
T01
T0M06;
Tool command

TNO
GROUP NO.
LIFE (M)
TIME (M)
1
2
3
2
1
1
H.NO.
D NO.
OFFSET H
OFFSET D
60
0
0
65
0
0
60
Tool command number T01 that has been specified in the program is handled
as TNO. 1, and the TOOL LIFE INDEX display is searched for TNO.1.
The above example shows that TNO. 1 on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display is
for the tool that has reached its life. Thus, TNO. 4, which has the same group
number as that of TNO. 1, will be automatically selected instead.
2. Setting tool-compensation data

Tool-length compensation data and tool-diameter compensation data for the
individual tools which are to be used with an EIA/ISO program can be set on
the TOOL LIFE INDEX display. There are two methods of setting the two
types of data. One method is by using the compensation numbers that
correspond to the offset values which have been set on the TOOL OFFSET
display, and the other method is by setting the desired offset values directly.
4-129
(1) When using compensation numbers:

The procedures for setting tool-length compensation data and tool-diameter
compensation data using compensation numbers are described below. The
descriptions given below assume that the cursor is already called on the TOOL
LIFE INDEX display.
[1] Using the cursor keys (
), move the cursor to that line
of the H.NO. item on which data is to be set.

- The message OFFSET H.NO.? will then be displayed.
[2] Input the appropriate compensation number for the particular offset value, and
then press the input key
- If the relationship between each offset value and compensation number is to

be checked, call the TOOL OFFSET display on the screen by pressing the
menu key TOOL OFFSET.
- The input compensation number will be displayed in the H.NO. item position,
and the cursor will move on to the D NO. item.
- Subsequently, the message OFFSET D NO.? will be displayed.
[3] Input the appropriate compensation number for the particular offset value, and
then press the input key .
- If the relationship between each offset value and compensation number is to
be checked, call the TOOL OFFSET display on the screen by pressing the
menu key TOOL OFFSET.
- The input compensation number will be displayed in the D NO. item position.
If compensation numbers are set on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display using this
method, these numbers take priority over any such number settings in the program.
Example:
Program
Tool-length
compensation number
H1 ;
Tool-diameter
compensation
D2 ;
TOOL OFFSET display

TNO.
1
OFFSET
10.1
2
3
4
10.2
10.3
10.4
T01T0M06;
For execution of the EIA/ISO program shown above:

If the following values are set in the H.NO. and D NO. items on the TOOL LIFE
INDEX display;
4-130

TNO.
1
GROUP NO.
1
H.NO.
3
D NO.
4
OFFSET H
OFFSET D LIFE (M)

0
TIME (M)
0
then the program will be executed with the tool-length compensation value (No.3=
10.3) and tool-diameter compensation value (No.4 = 10.4) that have been set on
the TOOL LIFE INDEX display, not with the tool-length compensation value (H1=
10.1) and tool-diameter compensation value (D2 = 10.2) that have been specified
in the program.
(2) Direct setting of compensation data:
The procedures for setting tool-length compensation data and tool-diameter
compensation data directly are described below.
of the OFFSET H item on which data is to be set.

- The message TOOL LENGTH REVISE? will then be displayed.
[2] Input appropriate compensation data and then press the input key
- If changes are to be made to tool-length data that are already set, the old data
can be overridden with new data simply by setting increments (or
decrements) through the use of INCR. For usage of INCR., see the
description INCR. that is given in item 5.-(1), screen operations, of section 46 TOOL DATA Display.
- The input compensation data will be displayed in the OFFSET H item position,
and the cursor will move on to the OFFSET D item.
- Subsequently, the message TOOL DIAMETER REVISE? will be displayed.
[3] Input appropriate compensation data and then press the input key
- If changes are to be made to tool-diameter data that are already set, the old
data can be overridden with new data simply by setting increments (or
decrements) through the use of INCR. For usage of INCR., see the
description INCR. that is given in item 5.-(1), screen operations, of section 46 TOOL DATA Display.
- The input compensation data will be displayed in the OFFSET D item position.
4-131
If compensation values are set on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display using this
method, these values take priority over any such value settings in the program.
Example:
TOOL OFFSET display
Program
Tool-length
compensation number
Tool-diameter
compensation number
H1 ;
TNO.
1
2
OFFSET
10.1
10.2
3
4
10.3
10.4
D2 ;
T01T0M06;
For execution of the EIA/ISO program shown above: If the following values are set
in the OFFSET H and OFFSET D items on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display:
GROUP NO.
1
2
1
2
H.NO.
D NO.
OFFSET H
10.5
OFFSET D LIFE (M)

10.6
0
60
TIME (M)
0
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
TNO.
61
then the program will be executed with the tool-length compensation value (10.5)
and tool-diameter compensation value (10.6) that have been set on the TOOL
LIFE INDEX display, not with the tool-length compensation value (H1 = 10.1) and
tool-diameter compensation value (D2 = 10.2) that have been specified in the
program.
Notes:
1. Data can be set in either the H.NO. item or the OFFSET H item for one tool.
2. Data can be set in either the D NO. item or the OFFSET D item for one tool.
3. If tool compensation data is not set on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display, the
compensation values that correspond to the compensation numbers specified
in the program become valid.
3. Setting tool-life control data

The procedure for setting tool-life control data on the TOOL LIFE INDEX
display is described below.
of the LIFE (M) item on which data is to be set.

- The message TOOL LIFE (MIN)? will then be displayed.
[2] Input the tool life (maximum available cutting time) in minutes with the numeric
keys, and then press the input key
- The input value will be displayed in the LIFE (M) item.

- At the same time, this value will also be set in the LIFE (M) item of the
corresponding tool number line on the TOOL DATA display. (If no tool data is
registered in this tool number line, this value will not be set.)
4-132
Example:
TNO.
1
2
3
LIFE (M)
TIME (M)
TOOL DATA display

TNO.
1
LIFE (M)
0
2
3
60
When 60, for example, is input,
TIME (M)
0
60
the same value will be set

automatically.
- The cursor will subsequently move on the TIME (M) item, and the message
TOOL CUTTING TIME (MIN)? will be displayed.
Note:
If data is not set in the LIFE (M) item for a tool (setting data 0 has been
remained), then the life information of that tool cannot be controlled
automatically.
[3] Input the tool operation time (cumulative cutting-feed time) in minutes with the
numeric keys, and then press the input key
- The input value will be displayed in the TIME (M) item.

- At the same time, this value will also be set in the TIME (M) item of the
corresponding tool number line on the TOOL DATA display if a tool has
already been registered under the corresponding tool number on the TOOL
DATA display. (If not, this value will not be set.)
Example:
TNO.
1
2
3
LIFE (M)
0
60
TIME (M)
0
5
TOOL DATA display

TNO.
1
2
LIFE (M)
0
60
TIME (M)
0
5
When 5, for example, is input,
the same value will be set

automatically.
- This data need not to be set for an unused tool. (0 is initially set in the TIME
(M) item.)
- Each time a tool is used for a cutting-feed operation, the tool operation time
will be integrated in minutes.
- When the operation time reaches the life data set in procedural step [2]
above, the display of the data settings in the TIME (M) item will be reversed.
4-133
Note:
On tool-life control during execution of MAZATROL and EIA/ISO programs:
(1) MAZATROL program
During execution of a MAZATROL program, although the data settings in the
TIME (M) item of the TOOL DATA display are integrated, those in the TIME
(M) item of the TOOL LIFE INDEX display are not integrated.
(2) EIA/ISO program
During execution of an EIA/ISO program, the data settings in the TIME (M) item
of the TOOL LIFE INDEX display are integrated. In addition, the data settings
in the TIME (M) item of the TOOL DATA display are also integrated if 1 has
been set in parameter F67.
(3) MAZATROL and EIA/ISO program
In combined use of MAZATROL and EIA/ISO programs as shown in the
diagram below, the data settings in the TIME (M) item of the TOOL DATA
display are integrated while the MAZATROL program is being executed, and
the data settings in the TIME (M) item of the TOOL LIFE INDEX display are
integrated while the EIA/ISO program is being executed. If, however, 1 has
been set in parameter F67, integration of the data settings in the TIME (M) item
of the TOOL DATA display will also occur even during execution of the
EIA/ISO program.
(1)
MAZATROL program
MAZATROL
TOOL DATA
(2)
EIA/ISO program
EIA/ISO
TOOL LIFE
INDEX
TOOL DATA
(3)
MAZATROL and EIA/ISO program

Main program
TOOL DATA
MAZATROL
Subprogram
EIA/ISO
TOOL LIFE
INDEX
M3S039
4-134
4. Erasing the registered tool data

The data that has been registered using methods 1., 2. and 3. above can be
erased for each tool. In addition, all sets of tool data that have been registered
can be erased at one time if required. The procedures for erasing the tool data
on a tool basis and for erasing all sets of tool data are described below.
(1) Erasing the tool data on a tool basis
[1] By pressing the cursor key
or
, move the cursor to the line of the
GROUP NO. item which contains the data to be erased.

Example:
When erasing the data that has been set on the line of TNO.5 shown in the
diagram below:
TNO. GROUP NO.
H.NO.
D NO.
OFFSET H
OFFSET D LIFE (M)
TIME (M)
1
2
3
1
2
3
10
9
8
5
6
7
60
60
60
10
11
12
60
13
60
14
10
60
15

- This will cause the display status of TOOL ERASE to reverse and the
message CURSOR POSITION ERASE <INPUT>? to present.
- The entire set of data present on the line blinking with the cursor will then be
erased.
- In the example shown in the diagram above, screen display will be as follows:
TNO. GROUP NO.
H.NO.
D NO.
OFFSET H
OFFSET D LIFE (M)
TIME (M)
1
2
3
1
2
3
10
9
8
5
6
7
60
60
60
10
11
12
60
13
10
60
15
5
6
- The reverse status of TOOL ERASE display will be subsequently cleared.
4-135
(2) Erasing all sets of tool data that have been registered
[1] Press the menu key ALL ERASE.
- This will cause the display status of ALL ERASE to reverse and the message
ALL ERASE < 9999 INPUT>? to present.
[2] Specify 9999 with the numeric keys and then press the input key
- Key-in
, and
, in this order.
- These keystrokes erase all the TOOL LIFE INDEX data settings.
- The reverse status of ALL ERASE display will be subsequently released.
5. Displaying PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE

Tool data having up to tool number 16 can be displayed on the first page of the
TOOL LIFE INDEX display.
To proceed to the next page, press the menu key NEXT PAGE. To return to
the immediately previous page, press the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE.
4-11
MODAL INFO. Display

Function:
If this display is called on the screen during automatic operation, it becomes
possible to check which of the G codes in various modal groups is currently
effective. This display only indicates the execution status of automatic operation;
the display does not allow screen operations to be carried out on it.
For details of the G codes, refer to the separate EIA/ISO Programming manual.
For reference, MODAL means to continue the operation until the designated
address receive a new command or that address is cancelled.
4-136
Data of the MODAL INFO. display:

WORK NO.
( )
SPINDL NO.
( )
GROUP
1
G1
2
G17
3
G91
4
G22
5
G94
6
G21
7
G40
8
G49
9
G80
10
G98
11
G50
12
G54
NEXT NO.
( )
UNIT NO.
BLOCK NO.
MAGAZIN NO.
( )
INDEX NO.
PALLET NO.
GROUP
13
G64
14
G67
15
16
G69
17
G97
18
G15
19
G50.1
X
Y
Z
4
5
6
F
S
T
M
B
D
H
* * * MODAL INFO. * * *
EIA/ISO
INFORM
( )
MODAL
INFORM
ALARM
PROCESS
MANAGE
HARD
COPY
M3S040
Note:
Values in the display are for reference; they are not actual values that are
displayed.
No.
Data name
Unit
Description
WORK NO.
Workpiece number of the program currently being executed
( )
Workpiece number of the subprogram currently being executed
UNIT NO.
Identification number of the program unit currently being executed
BLOCK NO.
Identification number of the program block currently being executed
SPINDL NO.
Identification number of the tool mounted on the spindle
( )
Name of the tool mounted on the spindle
NEXT NO.
Identification number of the standby tool
( )
Name of the standby tool
MAGAZIN NO.
Identification number of the magazine pocket
( )
Name of the tool accommodated in the magazine pocket
INDEX
Index angle of table
PALLET NO.
Identification number of the pallet being used (This data is displayed

only when the machine has a pallet change function.)
GROUP
G code in each modal group which is currently effective
Command being executed
4-137
4-12
ALARM Display
TOTAL = 1
402
ILLEGAL FORMAT
* * * ALARM * * *
( )
EIA/ISO
MODAL
INFORM
INFORM
ALARM
PROCESS
HARD
MANAGE
COPY
M3S041
The ALARM display can display up to 16 alarm states of which the causes are not
yet eliminated.
For several such alarm states, this display can also indicate special values for ease
of locating the causes. See in separate volume Alarm list, for details of 16 alarm
states and messages.
4-13
PROCESS WORK Display

Function:
Each machining program is divided into several processes according to the drumchanging process unit, the pallet-changing process unit, and their respective
process-end units. The PROCESS WORK display should be called on the screen
when checking the status of connection of these processes or when checking the
configuration of subprograms within processes.
Note:
Subprograms that are called from the EIA/ISO programs will not be displayed on
this display.
4-138
Data of the PROCESS WORK. display:

PNO
DRUM NO.
!
MAIN
1001 M
SUB 1
SUB 2
SUB 4
SUB 5
SUB 6
SUB 7
SUB 8
SUB 9
SUB 10
1002 M
1003 M
1004 M
4
5
6
1005 M
1006 M
1007 M
1009 M
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
1008 M
1010 M
1011 E
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
7
8
9
10
11
12
SUB 3
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
1
2
3
1010 M
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
LNO.
PALLET NO.
!
1009 M
13
14
1008 M
* * * PROCESS WORK NO. 9999 * * *

WORK NO.
PROC NO.
SEARCH
( )
PROGRAM
LAYOUT
PROGRAM
M3S042
No.
Data name
Unit
Description
PNO.
Process number
DRUM NO.
Identification number of the tool drum to be used
PALLET NO.
Identification number of the pallet to be used
LNO.
Layout number
MAIN
Workpiece number of the main program
SUB 1
Workpiece number of the subprogram (Nesting 1)
SUB 2
SUB 3
SUB 4
SUB 5
SUB 6
SUB 7
SUB 8
SUB 9
SUB 10
4-139
Display operations:
When the PROCESS WORK display is changed over from another display, the
following menu will be displayed in the menu display area:
WORK NO. PROC NO.
SEARCH
PROGRAM PROGRAM
LAYOUT
1. Workpiece-number search
When the PROCESS WORK display is called up on the screen, the display
status of WORK NO. will reverse. In addition, the process control data of the
program which was selected in the previous operation will be displayed on the
screen. Therefore, the workpiece number of the program whose process
control data is to be checked must be specified first.
In response to the message WORK PIECE PROGRAM NUMBER?, specify
the corresponding workpiece number using the following procedure:
program whose process control data is to be displayed. Then, press the input
key
- The input workpiece number will then be displayed in the MAIN item (data
portion ), and the process control data of the specified program will be
displayed on the screen.
- The reverse-display status of WORK NO. will subsequently be released.
2. Process-number search
When a workpiece number is input using the above-mentioned operating
procedure [1], control data related to the first process of the specified program
will be displayed. If control data related to the other processes of the specified
program is to be checked on the screen, use the procedure described below.
[1] Press the menu key PROC. NO. SEARCH.
- This will cause the display status of PROC. NO. SEARCH to reverse and the
message PROCESS NO.? to display.
[2] Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the identification number of the
process whose control data is to be checked. Then, press the input key
- The input process number will then be displayed in the PNO. item (data
portion ), and the control data of the specified process will be displayed on
the screen.
- Subsequently, the reverse-display status of PROC. NO. SEARCH will be
released.
4-140
3. Functions of other menu items
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
- The cursor can be moved downward on a process basis by pressing the

menu key .
- The cursor can be moved upward on a process basis by pressing the menu
key
.
- The display can be switched over to the PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display by
pressing the menu key PROGRAM LAYOUT.
- The display can be switched over to the WK. PROGRAM display by pressing
the menu key PROGRAM.
4-141
4-13-1
PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display

Function:
Tool data used in each process is indicated in machining order on the PRG.
LAYOUT PROCE. display.
This display will be indicated when the menu key PROGRAM LAYOUT on the
PROCESS WORK display is pressed.
NO.
999
PRI NO.
99
SEQ
R1
TOOL
F-MILL
NOM-z
999. 9A
LNO.
999
WORK NO.
9999M
UNO.
999
UNIT
FACE MIL
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
Data of the PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display
* * * PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. NO. 9999 * * *

( )
PROCESS
CONTROL
NEXT
PAGE
M3S043
Note:
No.
Data name
Unit
Description
NO.
Order of machining priority
PRI NO.
Tool priority number
SEQ
Tool sequence number
TOOL
Tool name
NOM-z
LNO.
Layout number
WORK NO.
Workpiece number of the program
UNO.
Unit number
UNIT
Name of the unit
mm (inch)
Nominal diameter of the tool
4-142
Display operations:
When the PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display is called from the PROCESS WORK
display, the following menu will be indicated in the menu display area:
PROCESS
NEXT
CONTROL
PAGE
Here, if the menu key PROCESS CONTROL is pressed, the display will change
back to PROCESS WORK display.
On the PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display, up to the 15th set of tool data per page is
displayed. The 16th and subsequent sets of tool data can be displayed by pressing
the menu key NEXT PAGE. For the repeat counts of multi-workpiece machining
processes or subprogram execution processes, only one round of process data will
be displayed each time.
4-14
Machining Management Functions (Option)

The machining management functions are designed so that machining
management information for each pallet can be managed by saving the information
into a PALLET MANAGEMENT display area and pallet ID information separate
from the machining program data field. This allows the machining program
sequence to be changed according to the status of the workpiece without updating
the program. These functions are therefore effective for multi-pallet types of
machines, in particular, that have recently come into widespread use.
4-143
4-14-1
Function overview
1. Scheduled-operation function
Allows the machining sequence to be designated for each pallet on the
PALLET MANAGEMENT display. This eliminates the need for program
updating.
2. External unit skipping function
Allows the MMS unit and subprogram unit of a machining program to be
designated on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display as the program units to be
skipped.
3. External multi-piece machining function
Allows a multi-piece machining process to be included in a machining program
by designating that process on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.
4. Jig offsetting function
Allows offsetting data from a reference pallet to be designated on the PALLET
MANAGEMENT display. Thus, constant machining accuracy can be achieved
even when workpieces of the same type are machined using multiple pallets.
Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display:
NO.
PALET
WNO.
STATE
ORDER
NUMBER
1
2
3
1
2
3
10
READY
1
!
!
0
0
0
4
5
6
4
5
6
!
!
0
0
0
7
8
9
PALLET NO. 1
NO. 1
WORK NO.
UNIT SKIP SWITCH
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ON ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
OFF ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
MULTIPLE SWITCH
10
11
12
10
MAIN
A
B
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
C
D
00000
00000
00000
00000
JIG OFFSET
13
14
15
16
0.
Y
Z
0.
0.
* * * PALLET MANAGEMENT * * *
( )
EDIT
PREVIOUS
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE
M3S044
4-144
Display operations:
The procedure for calling up the PALLET MANAGEMENT display;
[1] Press the display selector key (green key located to the left of the menu keys).
POSITION COMMAND
TRACE
PROGRAM
TOOL
TOOL
TOOL
FILE
DATA
LAYOUT
PAR
DATA
I/O

EIA/ISO
MODAL
INFORM
INFORM
ALARM
PROCESS
MONITOR ARRANGE
CONTROL
HARD
COPY
[2] Press the menu key ARRANGE.

PALLET
TOOL
WORK
MANAG.
OFFSET
OFFSET
ADDITION
TOOL
TOOL
DATA
LAYOUT
MEASURE
[3] Press the menu key PALLET MANAG.

- The PALLET MANAGEMENT display will then be indicated.
4-14-2
Scheduled-operation function
1. Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display
Data displayed for the scheduled-operation function is described below. (On the
screen, the data is indicated as through .)
No.
Data name
Description
PALET
The number of pallets that is initially set for the particular machine specifications is displayed.
WNO.
The number of the machining main program to be used for each pallet is displayed.
STATE
The machining status is displayed for each pallet.

(Blank)
..........
READY . . . . . . . . . .
CUTTING . . . . . . . .
Indicates that machining will not be performed. Machining will be

performed only if ! is not displayed under ORDER.
Indicates that the machine is ready for machining.
Indicates that machining is in progress.
OVER . . . . . . . . . . .
(Alarm No.) . . . . . . .
UNMADE . . . . . . . .
Indicates that machining has been completed.

Identifies the alarm that has occurred during machining.
Indicates that machining has been aborted since the reset button was
pressed during machining.
ORDER
The machining order is displayed for each pallet.

Machining will not be performed if the pallet number has a displayed ! or UNMADE.
NUMBER
The total count of times of machining up to that time is displayed. The maximum count is 9999.
4-145
2. Data editing methods

WNO., STATE, ORDER, NUMBER and multiple process numbers are set for
editing scheduled-operation data. These methods are described below.
(1) Setting WNO.
Set the numbers of the main programs to be executed for each pallet.
[1] Press the menu key EDIT on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.
Only the number of pallets that is predetermined for the particular machine
specifications will then be displayed.
[2] Move the cursor to WNO. of the intended workpiece using the cursor keys.
NO.
PALET
WNO.
STATE
3
.
.
.
ORDER
NUMBER
Cursor
[3] When the inquiry message WORKPIECE PROGRAM NUMBER? is displayed,

using the appropriate numeric key(s), enter the number of the machining
program (main routine) which corresponds to the pallet. Then press the input
key
Example:
To set WNO. 123, press
in this order.
(2) Setting data in STATE item

Set the status of machining on each pallet.
[1] Move the cursor to STATE item using the cursor key.
NO.
PALET
WNO.
123
3
.
.
.
STATE
ORDER
NUMBER
Cursor
[2] When the inquiry message STATE <MENU>? is displayed, press the menu
key SET END and set READY if operational setup for palletizing has been
finished and the machine is ready for machining.
If READY is set, the machining order will also be set automatically. Data
displayed under ORDER item at this time will be the number next to that of a
pallet having a displayed READY.
4-146
- To cancel READY present under STATE item, press the menu key ERASE.
STATE item will become blank, ! will be displayed under ORDER item,
and the data under ORDER item for other pallets will be converted.
NO.
PALET
WNO.
STATE
ORDER
10
READY
20
READY
30
READY
40
READY
50
READY
6
.
.
.
60
EADY
R
4
Cursor
Cancel READY on the line PALET 6.

Press the menu key ERASE.
NO.
PALET
WNO.
STATE
ORDER
10
READY
20
READY
30
READY
40
READY
50
READY
60
5
!
7
.
.
.
4-147
(3) Changing data in ORDER

When changing the machining order that has already been set, move the
cursor to that field of ORDER item, enter new data using the appropriate
numeric key(s) and press the input key
Example:
NO.
PALET
WNO.
STATE
ORDER
10
READY
20
READY
30
READY
40
READY
50
READY
6
.
.
.
60
READY
Cursor
Update the data of ORDER in line PALET 4 to 1.

Press
and
NO.
PALET
WNO.
STATE
ORDER
10
READY
20
READY
30
READY
40
READY
11
50
READY
60
READY
The data updates to 1.
7
.
.
.
(4) Setting data in NUMBER item

Data from 0 to 9999 can be set and it will be counted from the set data at the
end of machining.
Notes:
1. If the data more than 9999 is set under NUMBER item, it will not be
counted even at the end of machining.
2. The data set under NUMBER item is not in relation with the data set under
NUMBER item in end unit.
(5) Setting multiple process numbers
If the machining program for pallets is structured for each workpiece and/or
each process separately, multiple main programs can be set by setting the
numbers of those processes.
4-148
[1] Move the cursor to the position of the pallet number for which multiple
processes are to be executed.
Example:
To set multiple processes for PALET 3:
NO.
PALET
WNO.
STATE
ORDER
10
READY
20
READY
30
READY
40
READY
50
READY
60
READY
7
.
.
.
Cursor
[2] Press the menu key PLURAL PROCESS, and press the input key
NO.
PALET
WNO.
STATE
ORDER
10
READY
20
READY
READY
30
READY
40
READY
50
READY
7
.
.
.
60
READY
Erasing a process number
[1] Move the cursor to the position of that process number of all those previously
set for the multi-process pallet that is to be erased.
NO.
PALET
WNO.
STATE
ORDER
10
READY
20
READY
30
READY
40
READY
50
READY
7
.
.
.
60
READY
Cursor
4-149
[2] Press the menu key ERASE, and press the input key
NO.
PALET
WNO.
STATE
ORDER
10
READY
20
READY
30
READY
40
READY
50
READY
60
READY
7
.
.
.
(6) ALL ERASE

This function clears the entire schedule that has been set. Carry out this
function when using Initialize for the first time in the initial status of the NC
system (that is, immediately after the NC system has been loaded).
<Setting method>
Press the menu key ALL ERASE. When the message ALL ERASE <9999
INPUT>? is displayed, enter 9999 and then press the input key
The display will then be initialized.

3. Starting scheduled operation and its progress display
The procedure for starting scheduled operation and the display of the progress
of scheduled operation are described below.
(1) Starting procedure and progress display
1) Enter necessary data on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.
See subparagraph 2., Data editing methods, for further details.
2) Make the scheduled-operation mode effective using an external switch.
WORK NO. on the COMMAND display will then become highlighted red.
3) Press the start button. Machining will begin with the workpiece of
machining order number 1 and the status will change into CUTTING.
4) When machining is completed, OVER and ! will be displayed under
STATE and ORDER items, respectively, and new data for other pallets will
be displayed under ORDER item.
4-150
Example:
NO.
PALET
WNO.
STATE
ORDER
10
READY
20
READY
2
1
30
CUTTING
40
READY
50
READY
60
READY
7
.
.
.
Machining PALET 3 is completed.
NO.
PALET
WNO.
STATE
ORDER
10
20
READY
CUTTING
30
OVER
40
READY
50
READY
60
READY
7
.
.
.
5) The machining process that corresponds to the pallet number having a

newly displayed 1 under ORDER item will start.
(2) Editing in the scheduled-operation mode
Even during scheduled operation, editing can be done on the PALLET
MANAGEMENT display, except for the line of 1 under ORDER item
(machining now in progress).
See subparagraph 2. Data editing methods, for further details of editing.
If the machining for pallets is finished during EDIT mode, the machine will be
stopped. In this case, press the menu key EDIT END, then press start button
to continue machining.
(3) Restarting in the scheduled-operation mode
Restarting in the scheduled-operation mode can be done in the following two
cases only.
1) If the workpiece number of 1 under ORDER item is the same as that
displayed on the COMMAND display
2) If unit skipping is designated
For 2) above, if the unit skipping switch is on, execution of that unit will be
skipped and the immediately succeeding unit will be executed.
4-151
4. Other precautions
(1) Pressing the RESET key changes CUTTING to UNMADE. If there are pallets to
be machined, set READY under STATE.
(2) If an alarm occurs during machining, the alarm will be processed as follows:
- The alarm number is set under STATE.
- ! is displayed under ORDER, and the machining order is updated.
- If the alarm is of such a type that machining can be continued, the machining
operation will start from the machining program preset for the next process. If
machining cannot be continued, it will terminate on occurrence of the alarm.
Note:
Do not set a multi-process program that enables machining to be done only
after the preprocess has been completed. If such a program is set and an
alarm occurs, the previous process will remain aborted and the next process
will begin. Use a subprogram if such programming is required.
(3) The external switch must be turned off when machining is to be done in the
normal mode. If machining is done in the scheduled-operation mode, scheduled
operation will be carried out with automatically updated workpiece numbers.
- Distinction of sheculed-operation and normal-mode operation:
If the workpiece numbers on the COMMAND display are displayed red in
highlighted form, then scheduled-operation is in effect.
If the workpiece numbers on the COMMAND display are not displayed red in
highlighted form, then normal-mode operation is in effect.
4-14-3
External unit skipping function

1. Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.
No.
Data name
Description
PALET NO
The pallet number corresponding to data is displayed.
WORK NO.
The workpiece number corresponding to data is displayed.
UNIT SKIP
SWITCH
The program is controlled according to ON (skipping), OFF (no skipping) of the bit corresponding to
a skip number from 0 to 9 on that program.
2. Entering data
Set UNIT SKIP SWITCH as follows to activate the external unit skipping
functions.
4-152
[2] Press the cursor key(s) to move the cursor to the position of the intended pallet
number.
[3] Press the menu key EXIT. INP. EDIT.
- The cursor will be moved to the UNIT SKIP SWITCH item.
[4] Move the cursor to the position of the intended skip number.
[5] Pressing ON or OFF menu key completes UNIT SKIP SWITCH setting.
[6] Set either from 0 to 9 in the $ field of the subprogram unit on the WK.
PROGRAM display. Refer to the Programming manual for setting procedure.
[7] Press the menu key EDIT END on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.
3. Starting operation
See subsection 4-14-2. The operating procedure is the same.
4. Operation
A specific example is shown below.
Example:
Pallet 1
Pallet 2
Machined
WNO.
100
WNO.
WNO.
200
100
Machined
WNO.
200
Unmachined
Unmachined
M3S045
4-153
Program WNO. 1 (Main program)

UNO.
1
WPC-1
UNO.
2
300
300
400
WORK NO.
REPEAT
ARGM1
100
WORK NO.
REPEAT
200
SUB PRO
UNO.
3
SUB PRO
ARGM1
PALLET MANAGEMENT display

NO. PALET WNO. STATE
ORDER NUMBER
NO. 1
READY
PALET NO. 1
READY
WORK NO. 1
UNIT SKIP SWITCH
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
!
ON
OFF
! ! ! !!!!!
NO. 2
PALET NO. 2
For pallet 1, since unit skipping switch 1

is set to ON, UNO. 2 (that is,
subprogram No. 100) will be skipped.
For pallet 2, since unit skipping switch 2
is set to ON, UNO. 3 (that is,
subprogram No. 200) will be skipped.
4-14-4
WORK NO. 1
UNIT SKIP SWITCH
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
!
ON
OFF
! ! ! ! !!!
!!
External multi-piece machining function

1. Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.
No.
Data name
MULTIPLE
SWITCH
Description
Multi-piece machining will be performed if the bits corresponding to the multi-piece machining flag
(MULTI FLAG) on the program are correspondingly set.
2. Entering data
Set MULTIPLE SWITCH as follows to activate the external multi-workpiece
machining functions:
[2] Press the cursor key(s) to move the cursor to the position of the intended pallet
number.
4-154
[3]
Press the menu key EXT. INP. EDIT.
[4] Set the cursor to the MAIN, A, B, C, or D data item of MULTIPLE SWITCH.
[5] Press data key 0 or 1 to enter a 10-bit number of 0s or 1s.
[6] If you have selected either one from A to D in step [4] above, set that selected
switch in the $ field of the subprogram unit on the WK. PROGRAM display.
Refer to the Programming manual for the setting procedure.
[7] Press the menu key EDIT END on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.
3. Starting operation
See subsection 4-14-2. The operating procedure is the same.
4. Operation
A specific example is shown below.
Example:
Pallet 2
Pallet 1
Machined
Unmachined
Machined
Unmachined
M3S046
Program WNO. 1 (Main program)
UNO.
MAT
INITIAL-Z
ATC MODE
MULTI MODE
CST IRN
50
5*2
UNO.
1
WPC-1
MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y

1100010101
10
10
X
300
Y
300
k
0
Z
400
WORK NO.
100
$
A
REPEAT
1
ARGM 1
CONTI.
0
NUMBER
0
UNO.
2 LINE OUT
SNO.
R1
E-MILL
FIG
1
SQR
UNO.
3
SUB PRO
UNO.
4
END
4-155
4
0
Program WNO. 100 (Subprogram)

UNO.
MAT
INITIAL-Z
ATC MODE
MULTI MODE
MULTI FLAG
CST IRN
50
OFFSET
OFS
1
X
10
Y
10
2
3
20
30
20
30
PITCH-X PITCH-Y
!
MULTI FLAG
consider
0000000111
UNO.
1 DRILLING
SNO.
1
CTR-DR
2
DRILL
FIG
1
PT
UNO.
2
END
CONTI.
1
NUMBER
0

NO. PALET WNO. STATE
ORDER NUMBER
READY
READY
NO. 1
PALET NO. 1
WORK NO. 1
UNIT SKIP
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SWITCH ON
OFF! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
MULTIPLE
SWITCH
10
MAIN
A
B
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
C
D
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
NO. 2
PALET NO. 2
WORK NO. 1
UNIT SKIP
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SWITCH ON
OFF! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
MULTIPLE
SWITCH
MULTIPLE SWITCH MAIN corresponds

to the MULTI FLAG on the main
program, and MULTIPLE SWITCH A to
D (set in $ of the subprogram unit)
correspond to the MULTI FLAG on the
subprogram.
4-156
10
MAIN
A
B
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 0
C
D
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
- Pallet 1
(Main program)
MAIN
0000000000
(If all bits are 0s, they will all be handled the
same as 1s.)
MAIN
1111111111
MULTI FLAG1100010101
Common
(Subprogram)
A
1100010101
0000000000
(If all bits are 0s, they will all be handled the
same as 1s.)
(Main program)
A
1111111111
Common
- Pallet 2
0000000111
(Subprogram)
(Main program)
MAIN
1100000000
Common
1100000000
(Subprogram)
A
0000000101
Common
4-14-5
0000000101
Jig offsetting function

1. Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display
No.
Data name
Description
JIG OFFSET
The amounts of offset from the reference point of a reference pallet at a table angle of 0 degrees
are input to X, Y, and Z with plus or minus signs.
2. Entering data
Set JIG OFFSET as follows to activate the jig offset function.
[2] Press the cursor to move the cursor to the position of the intended pallet
number.
[3] Press the menu key EXT. INP. EDIT.
[4] Set the cursor to the X, Y or Z data item of JIG OFFSET.
4-157
[5] Using the numeric key(s), set the amount of offset from the reference point of
a reference pallet and press the input key
[6] Press the menu key EDIT END.

3. Meaning of jig offset data
When, as shown below, the reference point differs between the reference pallet
jig (indicated by a discontinuous line) and the intended jig (indicated by a
continuous line), set the amounts of offset at a table angle of 0 degrees ($x,
$y, $z) as the offsetting data for the jig you are going to use.
The offsetting data thus set will be added to the program coordinates and the
machining program will operate on the coordinate systems having the added
data.
$Z
X-Z direction
+X
$X
+Z
Jig
M3S047
Y-Z direction
X-Y direction
$Z
$Y
$X
$Y
+Y
+Z
+Y
+X
M3S048
Note:
Discontinuous line:
Continuous line:
$X, $Y, $Z:
Reference pallet jig

Non-reference pallet jig
Amounts of offset from the reference point of a reference
pallet
4-158
4. Notes
Strictly observe the following notes when using the jig offsetting function:
(1) Data containing the jig offsetting data is displayed in the field of WPC
(workpiece coordinates) of the COMMAND display.
(2) Set jig offsetting data to 0 if the jig offsetting function is not to be used.
(3) Jig offsetting will not be performed if the table is rotated using the B code
commands of manual programs or EIA programs. Only the indexing unit will
be executed in such a case.
(4) Since the jig offsetting function only corrects any offsets in each axis
direction, no corrections are performed for any offsets in the rotational
direction of each axis.
1) XZ direction
+X
+Z
Offsetting possible
Offsetting impossible
M3S049
2) Y direction
Offsetting possible
Offsetting impossible
M3S050
(5) During MMS measurement, data not containing the jig offsetting data is
written into the program coordinate data area.
4-159
4-14-6
Parameters
The following lists parameters related to the machining management functions:
Parameter
Setting value
L54
0
1
The machining management functions become invalid.

Pallet ID operation is selected.
Machining management operation is selected.
On the PALLET MANAGEMENT display, workpiece numbers are:

Displayed
Not displayed
L53
4-14-7
Description
Machining management data writing macro-program

1. Overview
The UNIT SKIP SWITCH data, MULTIPLE SWITCH data, and JIG OFFSET
data that are saved within the machining management feature can be updated
from macro-programs.
Updating uses special system variables. For macroprograms that only require
setting of data in those variables, however, special setting is required for
updating.
This feature becomes valid only when the main program is a MAZATROL
program.
Updating will not occur if an updating program is executed alone. Make an
updating program so that it can be called using a subprogram unit of a
MAZATROL program.
Main program
(MAZATROL)
Main program
(EIA/ISO)
Updated
Subprogram unit
NO. 1
PALLET NO.
M99;
WORK NO.
1234
UNIT SKIP SWITCH
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ON
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
OFF
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
MULTIPLE
SWITCH
10
6
5
1
Updated machining
management data
becomes valid
MAIN
A
B
00000
00111
00000
01111
00000
00000
C
00000
D 00000
JIG OFFSET
00000
00000
X
Y
Z
Updated feature overview
4-160
1.234
0.123
0.012
2. Making an updating program

Make an updating program into a configuration that allows a macro-program to
be called using a subprogram unit of a MAZATROL program.
(1) MAZATROL program to be used for call
A calling program must be made as follows. Otherwise, the machine will
operate incorrectly.
Macroprogram
Machining unit
Process 1
End-of-process unit
M99;
Each subprogram unit
Calling up the write macro-
ends with an end-ofprocess unit
Subprogram unit
program
End-of-process unit
Process 2
Maching unit
Calling program configuration

Make a calling program so that each subprogram unit ends with an end-of-process
unit, as shown in the diagram above.
Also, set the subprogram units as follows:
- Setting the subprogram units
[1] Call the following menu and press the menu key OTHER.
POINT
LINE
FACE
MANUAL
OTHER
WPC
OFFSET
MACH-ING MACH-ING MACH-ING PROGRAM
SUB
PROGRAM
MMS
DRUM
PALLET
CHANGE
CHANGE
INDEX
PROCESS
END
[2] Press the menu key SUB PROGRAM.

- The cursor blinks at WORK NO. item.
UNO
UNIT
SUB PRO
WORK NO.
- The menu display will change over to the following menu.

MEASURE
MACRO
4-161
SHAPE
CHECK

M CODE
END
[3] Press the menu key MEASURE MACRO.

[4] Set a write macro program number using the numeric keys.
- The workpiece number is displayed yellow in the WORK NO. item.
UNO
UNIT
SUB PRO
WORK NO.
1234
[5] When using an argument(s), move the cursor to the ARGM item and set an
argument(s) using the numeric keys.
UNO
UNIT
WORK NO.
SUB PRO
1234
ARGM
- Supplementary description
The following lists restrictions, and the reasons, as to the making of a calling
program:
Restriction 1
Reason
The write macro calling subprogram unit must end with an endof-process unit.
The NC performs data check and other pre-processing operations
on a machining program process basis. If a write macro-program
is not separated as one process, therefore, pre-processing will be
performed on all subsequent machining units including skipped
units before write operations are performed. This will result in an
abnormal machine action even if the UNIT SKIP SWITCH data is
set to ON.
Restriction 2
Reason
The menu key MEASURE MACRO menu key must be pressed to

set a subprogram unit workpiece number.
The NC pre-reads the selected machining program. When
machining management data is to be written, pre-reading must be
stopped immediately. The NC stops the pre-reading operation on
execution of the subprogram unit that you have set after pressing
the menu key MEASURE MACRO.
Note:
Special processing must be done to restart from the stopped status of pre-reading
by the NC. Do not use the menu key MEASURE MACRO, except when the usage
is clearly indicated.
4-162
(2) Write macro-program

Writing uses special system variables. System variables for various types of
machining management data are listed in the table below.
Machining management data and system variables
Data name
System variables
number
UNIT SKIP SWITCH
#50443
Decimal, without decimal point
MULTI FLAG MAIN
#50441
MULTI FLAG A
#50435
MULTI FLAG B
#50433
MULTI FLAG C
#50431
MULTI FLAG D
#50429
JIG OFFSET X
#50449
(mm), decimal, with decimal point
JIG OFFSET Y
#50447
JIG OFFSET Z
#50445
Setting
Note:
Since UNIT SKIP SWITCH data and MULTI FLAG data are both binary bit data,
they must be converted into decimal data when set.
Example:
To write 0000001111 into the UNIT SKIP SWITCH data area, set the data as
follows:
#50443=15; (15= 231+221+21+1)
System variables for various types of data have been listed above. Writing is not
performed just by setting data for these variables. To let the NC perform write
operations, system variables for write control must be further set. Write control
system variables are listed in the table below.
Write control system variables
Description
System variables
number
Write data valid flag
#50467
Setting
bit 0: UNIT SKIP SWITCH valid
bit 1: MULTI FLAG MAIN valid
bit 2: MULTI FLAG A valid
bit 3: MULTI FLAG B valid
bit 4: MULTI FLAG C valid
bit 5: MULTI FLAG D valid
bit 6: JIG OFFSET X valid
bit 7: JIG OFFSET Y valid
bit 8: JIG OFFSET Z valid
Write start request flag
#50499

bit 1: Write start request
4-163
Notes:
1. Since system variables #50467 and #50499 are both decimal data, binary bit
data must be converted into decimal data when setting.
Example:
To write only UNIT SKIP SWITCH data and MULTI FLAG A, set the data as
follows:
#50467=5 ; (=000000101)
2. Since other features also use it, system variable #50499 must be set as follows
for identification:
#50499=#50499 OR 2;
3. System variable #50499 must be set at the end of a macro-program.
Sample: Write macro-program
9 8 7 6
UNIT SKIP SWITCH (Decimal) ON
!
(0 1 0 0
MULTIPLE SWITCH MAIN
0 0 0 0
MULTIPLE SWITCH A
0 0 1 1
JIG OFFSET X
1.234
JIG OFFSET Y
0.123
JIG OFFSET Z
5 4
!!
1 1
0 0
1 0
3 2 1 0
!!
0 0 1 1 ) = 307 (Decimal)
1 1 1 1 = 15 (Decimal)
0 0 0 0 = 224 (Decimal)
0.012
As shown above, make a macro-program for updating the current machining

management data if required.
Macro program
Main program
End-of-process unit
Subprogram unit
End-of-process unit
# 50467
= 0;
# 50443
= 307;
# 50467
= #50467 OR 1;
# 50441
= 15;
# 50467
= #50467 OR 2;
# 50435
= 224;
# 50467
= #50467 OR 4;
# 50449
# 50467
= #50467 OR 64;
# 50447
# 50467
= #50467 OR 128;
# 50445
# 50467
= #50467 OR 256;
# 50499
= #50499 OR 2;
M99;
%
4-164
1.234;
0.123;
0.012;

UNIT SKIP SWITCH
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ON
OFF!
! !
! !
MULTIPLE SWITCH
MAIN
A
B
C
D
! !
! !
10
6 5
1
00000 01111
00111 00000
00000 00000
00000 00000
00000 00000
JIG OFFSET
X
Y
Z
1.234
0.123
0.012
3. Machine action
Use the following parameter to select whether the write feature is to be made
valid or invalid;
Machine parameter L52
Set 0 to make the write feature invalid.

Set 1 to make the write feature valid.
Even when the write feature is made valid, writing will be performed only when
external CPU operation or scheduled operation (see Note 2) is performed. If the
write feature is made invalid or if wrong macro-program data is set, writing will not
occur (the machine will stop together with the display of an alarm 192 EXECUTION
IMPOSSIBLE).
Notes:
1. Even when the alarm occurs and writing is not performed, the machine action
will not stop if the menu key MEASURE MACRO was not be pressed when
using subprogram unit for calling the write macro-program.
2. External CPU operation and scheduled operation refer to the following types of
operation:
- External CPU operation
Automatic operation with machine parameter L54 set equal to 1 (Pallet-IDbased operation controlled by a CPU external to the NC)
- Scheduled operation
Schedule-mode-based automatic operation with machine parameter L54 set
equal to 2
4-165
4-15
EIA Program Monitoring Functions (Option)
4-15-1
Function overview
The following three functions are available on the PROGRAM MONITOR display:
1. Operational status check
Further detailed operational status of the machine is checked.
2. Monitoring
The currently active program block is displayed purple in highlighted form on
the displayed program list.
3. Program start position designation
Any position on the displayed program list where you want to start the program
can be designated using the cursor keys. This designation makes the entire
previous modal information ineffective.
The monitoring and program start position designation functions are valid only for
EIA/ISO programs. The monitoring function, however, becomes valid when an
EIA/ISO program is called as a subprogram from a MAZATROL program.
The program start position designation function cannot be used for subprograms.
4-166
- NOTE -
(4-167)
POSITION
PROGRAM
X -99999.999
N200 G0X100. 001Y100. 001Z100.001 ;

S2300M3M8X12.939Y22.222F.01 ;
Z-999.999 ;
N300 G28Z0 ;
N400 G0X100.001Y100.001Z100.001 ;
S2300M3M8X12.939Y22.222F.01 ;
Z-999.999 ;
N500 G28Z0 ;
N600 G0X100.001Y100.001Z100.001 ;
0.
0.
0.
0.
UNIT NO. 99999 [
BLOCK NO.
0.
0.
0.
20
50
69
TNO. 12345678
PKNO.
PALLET NO. 1
HEAD NO.
LOAD METER
RPM(1) 100000
M/MIN
MM/MIN
MM/REV
SPINDL 0%
X-AXIS
0%
Y-AXIS
0%
Z-AXIS
0%
EIA / ISO
(
WORK NO.
START P.
APPOINT
SEARCH
94
40 49 80 98
54 64 67
97 15 50.1 17.1
49.1
M# !0
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
N800 G0X100.001Y100.001Z100.001 ;
S2300M3M8X12.939Y22.222F.01 ;
0.
D #(!0)!!!!0
H #(!0)!!!!0
ACTIVE DATA
G# 1
17 91 23
X -99999.999
Y
99 [
TOOL OFFSET
MACHINE
S2300M3M8X12.939Y22.222F.01 ;
Z-999.999 ;
N700 G28Z0 ;
* * * PROGRAM MONITOR * * *!
WORK NO. 9999 (
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
PROGRAM MONITOR display

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
4-15-2
POSITION
SET
PROGRAM
COL.
SEARCH
STOP
MONIT.P
M3S125
4-168
No.
Data name
Unit
Description
PROGRAM
POSITION X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
Current position of the tool tip in the workpiece coordinate system
POSITION 4, 5
Degrees ( ) or mm
(inch)

(when an additional axis is provided)
MACHINE X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
Current position of the machine in the machine coordinate system
MACHINE 4, 5
Degrees ( ) or mm
(inch)

Program monitor display

Fourteen lines of the active program data are displayed.
MAZATROL programs are not displayed.
WORK NO.
( )
If a subprogram is currently being executed, the workpiece number of

that subprogram will be displayed in parentheses.
UNIT NO.
Number of the unit currently being executed
If the unit currently being executed is a five-face unit or a face

definition unit, the number of the unit will be displayed in brackets.
BLOCK NO.
Sequence number currently being executed
If the sequence currently being executed is a five-face sequence or a

face definition sequence, the number of that sequence will be
displayed in brackets.
TOOL OFFSET D#
Tool diameter compensation value.

The tool diameter compensation number is displayed in parentheses.
TOOL OFFSET H#
Tool length compensation value.

The tool length compensation number is displayed in parentheses.
TNO.
Spindle tool number

A group number, if specified, is displayed instead.
PKNO.
Spindle tool number
PALLET NO.
Number of the pallet being used (This data is displayed only when a
pallet change function is provided.)
HEAD NO.
Number of the spindle head being used (This data is displayed only
for five-face machining specification.)
RPM
( )
rpm
Revolutions per minute
The gear number is displayed in parentheses.
M/MIN (FT/MIN)
m/min (feet/min)
Circumferential speed of the spindle
MM/MIN (IN/MIN)
mm/min (inch/min)
Feed rate per minute
MM/REV (IN/REV)
mm/rev (inch/rev)
Feed rate per spindle revolution
LOAD METER SPINDL
Load on the spindle motor
LOAD METER X-AXIS
Load on the X-axis servo motor
LOAD METER Y-AXIS
Load on the Y-axis servo motor
LOAD METER Z-AXIS
Load on the Z-axis servo motor
ACTIVE DATA G#
Currently valid G-code in all modal groups
ACTIVE DATA M#
Currently valid M-code
MAZATROL or EIA/ISO
Indicates whether the program currently being executed is a

MAZATROL program or an EIA/ISO program.
4-169
Procedure for calling up the PROGRAM MONITOR display:

[1] Press the display selector key (green key located to the left of the menu keys)
until the following menu has been displayed:
EIA/ISO
MODAL
INFORM.
INFORM.
ALARM
PROCESS MEASURE MONITOR ARRANGE

CONTROL
EIA/ISO
HARD
COMMAND
COPY
[2] Then, press the menu key MONITOR.

[3] The following menu will then be displayed.
POSITION COMMAND
TRACE
PROGRAM
MODAL
MONITOR
INFORM
ALARM
EIA/ISO
COMMAND
Press the menu key PROGRAM MONITOR. The PROGRAM MONITOR

display will then be presented.
4-15-3
Description of the monitoring function

1. Reverse display colors
X100. Y100. ;
Blue:
Indicates the program start block existing in a reset status of the

machine or indicates the block which has been specified as the start
position using the program start position designation function.
Purple: Indicates the block that has been selected when restarting the
program or indicates the currently active block.
2. Menu key description
The following menu is displayed on the PROGRAM MONITOR display:
WORK NO. START P.
SEARCH
APPOINT
WORK NO.:
POSITION PROGRAM
SET
COL.
SEARCH
STOP
MONIT. P
Use this menu data to select a workpiece number for
which monitoring or program start position designation is

to be done.
START P. APPOINT: Use this menu data to designate the program start
position after moving the cursor to the program start
position. For details see subsection 4-15-4.
SEARCH:
Use this menu key to search the program for a character
string. The length of the character string which can be
searched for is up to 39 characters. To check further
details of the searching method, refer to the description
of chapter 7. EIA/ISO PROGRAM, given in the
programming manual for MAZATROL M-32.
4-170
Use this menu key to call the previous or next page.
POSITION SET:
Use this menu key to set the current position. For

further details, see 2. Re-setting the current position,
Fourteen lines of program data can be displayed on a

page.
given in subsection 4-10-1 TOOL OFFSET DATA

display.
PROGRAM:
Use this menu key to call the WK. PROGRAM display
on the screen.
COL. STOP (option): Use this menu key to set the collation stop function. For
further detais, see section 2-9 COL. STOP, given in the
operation manual for MAZATROL M-32 automatic
operation.
SEARCH MONIT. P: When the page is changed over under a reset status,
control will return to the starting block of the program or
the page corresponding to the block which has been
specified as the start position.
Notes:
1. Workpiece number search, start position designation, data search, page
feed, current position setting, and monitoring position search can be used
only under a reset status.
2. Start position designation, data search, page feed, current position setting,
and monitoring position search can be used only for EIA/ISO programs.
3. Display of the currently active block
One line of currently active block is displayed purple in reverse form.
Example:
G00Z50.;
X100. Y100. ;
Z0;
If the block consists of multiple lines, only the first line will be displayed in
reverse form.
4-171
4. Display form and screen scrolling

Up to fourteen lines of the active program data are displayed on the left hand of
the screen (one line contains up to 38 characters).
When execution
begins
Displayed blue in reverse form under a

reset status
The reverse display color changes from

blue to purple. During its execution, the
starting block of the program is
displayed on line 1.
PROGRAM
Z-10. ;
G90G80G54 ;
M30 ;
%
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
PROGRAM
G90G80G54 ;
G00X0Y0Z0 ;
G01X-100.F1000 ;
Y100. ;
Z-10. ;
.
.
The display scrolls each time a block is

executed. The active block is
displayed on line 2.
End
PROGRAM
G90G80G54 ;
G00X0Y0Z0 ;
G01X-100.F1000 ;
Y100. ;
Z-10. ;
.
.
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
PROGRAM
G90G80G54 ;
G00X0Y0Z0 ;
G01X-100.F1000 ;
Y100. ;
Z-10. ;
.
.
The display becomes blank after

execution of the ending line of the
program.
PROGRAM
M30 ;
%
When operation is completed, the ending line of the

program will move to the top of the display. When
the first page is called up, the starting block of the
program will be displayed blue in reverse from.
Note:
If the reset key is pressed to terminate operation in the middle of the program,
the active block at that time will move to the top of the display.
4-172
5. Subprogram display
For a program using subprogram calling, the subprograms will be presented on
the PROGRAM MONITOR display when execution is transferred to those
subprograms.
Also, the main program will be displayed when execution is returned from the
subprograms to the main program.
PROGRAM
Z10. ;
M98P1000 ;
Calling
subprogram
PROGRAM
G90G80G54 ;
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
Subprogram No. 1000
Main program
G00X0Y0Z0 ;
G01X-100.F1000 ;
Y100. ;
Z10. ;
X100. ;
.
.
6. Moving the cursor

The cursor keys
vertically move the cursor through the left
end of the displayed program.

If the cursor is positioned at the top of the displayed program, pressing further
the cursor keys will display the next page. If the cursor is positioned at the
bottom of the displayed program, pressing further the cursor keys will display
the previous page.
4-172-1
4-15-4
Program start position designation function

Function:
The program start position designation is used to designate any block from which
you want to start the program on the PROGRAM MONITOR display. This function,
unlike the restart function, ignores all program contents presented before the
designated block. Modal information must therefore be set before executing a
program using this function.
1. Designating a program start block
Designate a program start block as follows:
[1] Move the cursor to the block where you want to designate.
PROGRAM
G90G80G54;
G00X0Y0Z0;
G
01X 100. F1000;
Y100.;
[2] Press menu key START P. APPOINT:
WORK NO. START P.
SEARCH
APPOINT
POSITION PROGRAM
SET
COL.
SEARCH
STOP
MONIT.P
- The block indicated by the cursor will move to line 1 and will be displayed
blue in reverse form to indicate the start position.
PROGRAM
G01X 100.F1000;
Y100;
Z 10.;
.
.
.
Note:
- To cancel the designation, press the reset key. Cancellation by display
changeover cannot be made.
- To change the designation, move the cursor from that block to the desired
one and press the menu key START P. APPOINT once again.
4-172-2
2. Differences from the restart function

Although both the restart function and the program start position designation
function can be used to restart a program in the middle, the operation of the
machine differs significantly.
Program start position designation
Restart function
function
Program data is calculated from the head of the
The entire program data before the designated
program up to the designated block, and during

this time, modal information setting, program
error checking, etc. are performed.
block is ignored, and the program is restarted

from that block, based on the modal information
valid during execution. Therefore, modal data
Also, since the coordinates present before the

designated block have been stored, positioning
at those coordinates is performed before the
should be previously designated.
designated block is executed.
Example:
G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z0;
X100.;
This block is designated.

Program start position designation function
Restart function
Execution of designated block

Movement at dry run feedrate
Execution of designated block

X0
Y0
Z0
X 100.
Y0
Z0
X0
Y0
Z0
X 100.
Y0
Z0
M3S052
Notes:
1. If the start block is designated using the restart function, that block cannot be
changed directly with the program start position designation function. The
designated block must be reset in such a case.
2. If the start block is designated using the program start position designation
function, that block can be changed directly with the restart function.
4-172-3
4-15-5
Notes
Use program monitoring function with care to the following.
1. The active block during automatic operation is displayed purple in reverse form
on line 2. If, however, the active block is the starting block of the program, that
block will be displayed on line 1.
2. During automatic operation, one line of the block data immediately preceding
the active block data is displayed and if the preceding block consists of two
lines, only the first line of data will be displayed. The preceding block will not
be displayed if it consists of three lines or more.
3. The monitoring display of the active program can be made only during memory
operation.
The active program, therefore, is not displayed during tape
operation, MDI operation, or HDLC operation.
4. When a macro statement is displayed, the first space may be automatically
deleted and then displayed in left-justified form.
5. When block skip is specified, the skip-specified block will be displayed during
execution of the block succeeding that skip-specified block.
Example:
If block skip 1 is set:
PROGRAM
G01X-100. F1000 ;
Skip-specified block
Active block
/1Y100. ;
Z-10. ;
X100. ;
.
.
.
6. Programs whose display has been inhibited using the program management
functions are not displayed. Refer to section 4-22 Program Management
Function, for further details of the program management functions.
If a display-inhibited program is called up as a subprogram from the main
program, block M98 of the main program will be displayed during execution
of the display-inhibited program.
Example:
PROGRAM
G01X-100. F1000 ;
M98P9000 ;
Display during execution

No. 9000 denotes a display-inhibited
Z-10. ;
program.
X100. ;
.
.
.
7. If operation is stopped during execution of a subprogram, the subprogram will

remain intact on the display.
4-172-4
4-17
On-machine Measurement (Option)
4-17-1
Function overview
The MAZATROL M-32 system has three measurement functions:
- Automatic alignmentCan be used only for a MAZATROL program.
- Measurement print-outCan be called up with a user macro to measure hole
pitches, slopes, etc. and print out the results. This function works only for a
machining program.
- On-machine measurementCan be used in the manual mode.
Both automatic alignment and measurement print-out work with a program,
whereas on-machine measurement allows both dimensional measurement and
results display in the manual mode. With on-machine measurement, therefore, you
can easily perform measurements without preparing a program when machining
setup or dimensional measurement after machining has taken place. Since it
presents coordinates display in addition to dimensional display, the on-machine
measurement function can also be used for workpiece alignment.
4-17-2
Use of on-machine measurement

The on-machine measurement capability is designed for measuring work
dimensions and provided with alignment function.
1. Work dimension measurement
Items below can be measured.
- Diameter of circular shape and center coordinate value
- Surface workpiece coordinate value, slope gradient with respect to machine
coordinate axis
- Surface straightness, slope gradient with respect to machine coordinate axis
Measurement will be allowed in combination with the result of three items
above.
Center to center distance of circular shape
Distance between circular shape and surface
Surface to surface distance, parallelism, straightness, slope gradient
4-176
Center to center distance
Circle center to surface distance
Surface to surface distance
NM210-00446
2. Alignment function
For alignment with other than on-machine measurement capability, MDIMMS
function is provided. This is used to measure X-Y, X-Z, Y-Z plane coordinate
values. If work origin is at the center of a hole, measurement is impossible.
Further, MDIMMS is exclusively used for program WPC measurement, and so
it is not used to make coordinate confirmation only. Although MAZATROL MMS
unit can be used for this measurement procedure, program preparation time is
required. For alignement with on-machine measurement capability, coordinate
value of measurement point, center coordinate value of circular shape, and
slope gradient of surface can be shown, and WPC measurement with work
origin at the center of a hole can be accomplished.
4-177
4-17-3
Measurement pattern
Measurement patterns are available in five types as below.
- Circle measurement . . . . . . . . . . . Diameter and center coordinates of hole/boss
- Surface measurement . . . . . . . . . Surface coordinates, slope gradient
- Straightness measurement . . . . Straightness between two arbitrary points
- One-point measurement . . . . . . . Reference surface coordinate (on the measurement axis)
- Two-point measurement . . . . . . . Groove/Step center coordinate (on the measurement axis)
In addition, combinations of the leading three measurement patterns above can be
used to calculate distance, gradient, parallelism, and straightness.
1. Circle measurement (Three measurement points)
(1) Measuring procedure
- Measurement points A, B, and C can be positioned arbitrarily. (Three
points must be at different positions.)
- Measurement direction (touch sensor movement direction) must be one of
the axial directions (simultaneous two axes must not be used). In Z
direction, however, alarm will be made.
- Circle measurement is allowed only on X-Y plane.
- Z coordinate at points A, B, and C must be identical. If Z coordinate value
exceeds set parameter L12, alarm will be indicated, but measurement is
possible.
A
C
X
B
Y
M3S054
Parameter
L12
Point A
X
Point B
M3S055
4-178
2. Surface measurement
For surface measurement, surface to be measured must be parallel to either of
X-, Y- or Z-axes.
(1) Surface nomenclature
If the selected surface is parallel to the X-axis, that surface is referred to as
the X-axis surface. Likewise, if the selected surface is parallel to the Y-axis
or the Z-axis, that surface is referred to as the Y-axis surface or the Z-axis
surface, respectively.
Z
Y
Parallel to X-axis
X-axis surface
Y
Parallel to Y-axis
Y-axis surface
Y
Parallel to Z-axis
Z-axis surface
M3S056
(2) Selection of measurement surface

Which surface should be measured is determined from measuring JOG
direction and coordinates of two points on the surface. The following
describes the procedure.
1) Two axial surfaces are determined by JOG direction.
2) Axial surface is determined from comparison of point to point distance in
axial component.
Example:
JOG in X direction
Distance component: iz>iy
Y-axis surface selected

Z
iz
iy
M3S057
4-179
(3) Angle selection

Angular data for various axial surfaces should be as below.
1) X-axis surface . . . . . . . . . . .
CCW angle from +Y-axis on YZ plane
(150 in example below)
2) Y-axis surface . . . . . . . . . . .
CCW angle from +Z-axis on ZX plane
3) Z-axis surface . . . . . . . . . . .
CCW angle from +X-axis on XY plane
Z
-20
150
160
-45
-30
X-axis surface
Y-axis surface
X
135
Z-axis surface
M3S058

- Measurement points A, B should satisfy parameter L12fi. If L12<i,
alarm will be caused, but measurement is possible.
- Measurement direction (touch sensor movement direction) must be one of
the axial directions (simultaneous two axes must not be used).
- Measurement movement direction for measurement points A, B must be
identical. Different directions will cause alarm.
Z
A
i
B
X
Y
M3S059
4-180
3. Straightness measurement
(1) Selection of axial surface
Selection of axial surface is similar to that of surface measurement.
(2) Angle selection
Angle must be determined from a line approximated by the least square
method.
1 2
M3S060
- After manual measurement of A and B, points 1 n will be measured

automatically. The number of measurement points n must be entered by a
measuring operator. (1ene30)
- Measuring procedure is similar to that of surface measurement.
4. Distance, angle, parallelism, straightness
- Up to two items can be stored as data. Distance, angle, parallelism, and
straightness between two data items can be calculated and indicated.
- For calculation of parallelism and straightness, value will be indicated always
with data 1 as base.
4-17-4
MEASURE display
The MEASURE display must be called to use the on-machine measurement
function.
The procedure for calling up the MEASURE display is as follows:
[1] Press twice in succession the display selector key. The following menu will be
displayed.
EIA/ISO
MODAL
INFORM.
INFORM.
ALARM
PROCESS MEASURE
HARD
CONTROL
COPY
[2] Press the menu key MEASURE.

- The MEASURE display shown on the next page will be presented.
4-181
Data of the MEASURE display:
aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
aaaa
MES. POS.
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
HEAD NO.
(
)
HEAD ANGLE
(
)
X
Y
Z
WNO.
()
X
Y
k
Z
4
5
6
UNO.
()
SNO.
( )
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
MACHINE
X
Y
Z
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
POSITION
X
Y
Z
RESULT
!1:
X
Y
Z
k
D
ANGLE
DISTANCE
2:
ELEMENT
X
Y
Z
MM/MIN
PAR.PERP. ( )
MM
* * * MEASURE * * *
( )
CIRCLE
MEASURE
SURFACE
MEASURE
STRAIT.
MEASURE
1 POINT
MEASURE
STRAIT.
GRAPH
2 POINT
MEASURE
CLEAR
RESULT
COPY
RESULT
WRITE
M3S067
No.
Data name
Description
POSITION
Current coordinates
MACHINE
Machine coordinates
MES. POS.
Coordinates of the measurement point in the machine coordinates system
RESULT
Results of measurement. The selected measurement pattern is displayed after 1: and 2:

Types of measurement patternsCIRCLE, X PLANE, Y PLANE, Z PLANE, X STRAIT., Y
STRAIT., Z STRAIT, X STDRD, Y STDRD, Z STDRD, X CENTR, Y CENTR, Z CENTR
(and XY CRCL, YZ CRCL and XZ CRCL for 5-surface machining)
Circle
measurement
Surface
measurement
Straightness
measurement
One-point
measurement
Two-point
measurement
X
Y
Z
Center coordinates
Center coordinates Center coordinates Reference surface Center coordinate
(Z: Z-coordinate of
of two points.
of the start and
coordinate (on the (on the meas.
the first measurement
end points.
meas. axis).
axis) of two points.
point)
No display
Angle data
Angle data
No display
No display
Diameter data
No display
Degree of
straightness
No display
No display
4-182
No.
Data name
Description
DISTANCE
Linear distance between two measurement points. This field remains blank if the distance has not
been calculated.
Distance-calculatable pattern
Conditions
Circle to circle
None
Circle and the Z-axis surface

Circle and the degree of straightness with respect
to the Z-axis
None
Circle and the X-Y axis surface

Circle and the degree of straightness with respect
to the X-Y axis surface
The surface is parallel to the Z-axis (but within

the data range of parameter L13).
Same axis surface as each axis surface

Same degree of straightness as that of each axis
Two surfaces are equal in angle (but within the

data range of parameter L13).
Axis surface different from each axis surface

Straightness of axis different from that of each axis
Two surfaces are parallel (but within the data

range of parameter L13).
ELEMENT
Each axial components of the distance between two measurement points
ANGLE
Angle difference between two surfaces
PAR. PERP.
MM
%
- The degrees of parallelism and straightness are displayed in mm terms, and the angle difference
between two surfaces is displayed in % terms.
- The angle is calculated only for the same axis surface (straight surface). This field remains blank if
the angle has not been calculated.
- The degrees of parallelism and straightness are calculated only when the two surfaces are parallel
(the angle difference is equal to, or within 180 of, the L13 parameter data) or straight (the angle
distance is within 90 of the L13 parameter data).
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
- Each measurement pattern is graphically displayed at the same time that one measurement
pattern (excepting One/Two-point meas.) is selected on the menu.
Circle measurement
Surface measurement
M3S062
Straightness measurement
- During automatic measurement of the degree of straightness, the current number of measurement
points is displayed as follows:
B/A (A: Total number of measurement points, B: Current number of measurement points)
MM/MIN
Jog feedrate in mm/min. Jog feed is based on the data of parameter K41.
ON status of the skip signal. Turning the sensor to ON displays a red box (#) in the
parenthesized position.
WNO.
UNO.
Writing data
registration
area
Work No. (or workpiece origin G54 to G59 for EIA/ISO) as destination of coordinates writing (*)
Unit No. as destination of coordinates writing (*)
SNO.
Sequence No. as destination of coordinates writing (*)
X, Y,
Coordinate of each axis
k, Z,
4, 5, 6
HEAD NO.
No. of spindle head (Only for 5-surface machining)
HEAD ANGLE
Angle of spindle head (Only for 5-surface machining)

(*)
Used for coordinates writing. Refer to 4-17-10 for further details.
4-183
4-17-5
Measuring procedure
Measuring procedure is outlined below.
JOG mode
Manual pulse, jog, rapid feed mode
(MDI: During Straightness

measurement)
Measuring pattern
selection by menu
Touch sensor moved

close to measurement
point by manual feed
Contact made
End
by JOG
1. Circle measurement
Manual
JOG
[1st point]
JOG
Manual
Manual
JOG
JOG
JOG
JOG
[2nd point]
[3rd point]
M3S063
Operation
CIRCLE MEASURE
selected
Result
Reversal display of menu
Graphic indication of measurement pattern
Message FIRST POINT MEASURING
Jog feed
1st point
measurement
Indication of 1st point measurement coordinates

Target coordinate indication (Z coordinate)
Message SECOND POINT MEASURING
Jog feed
2nd point
measurement
Indication of 2nd point measurement coordinates

Target coordinate indication (Z coordinate)
Message THIRD POINT MEASURING
Jog feed
3rd point
measurement
Indication of 3rd point measurement coordinates

Measurement results indication
Graphic cleared
Reversal display of menu goes out.
End
4-184
2. Surface measurement
Manual
JOG
[1st point]
Manual
JOG
[2nd point]
M3S064
Operation
Result
Graphic indication
SURFACE MEASURE
selected
Jog feed
Indication of 1st point measurement coordinates
1st point
measurement
Target coordinate indication

Jog feed
Indication of 2nd point measurement coordinates
Graphic cleared
2nd point
measurement
End
4-185
3. Straightness measurement
Automatic
Manual
Manual
JOG
JOG
JOG
JOG
M3S065
Operation
Result
STRAIT. MEASURE
selected

Graphic indication
Message REQUEST STARTING POINT
Jog feed
Indication of start point measurement coordinates

Message REQUEST FINAL POINT
Start point
measurement
Jog feed
Indication of end point measurement coordinates

Message SELECT MDI MODE
End point
measurement
Jog feed
MDI
Message INP. NUMBER OF MEASURING

POINT?
* Menu unchanged
key selected
Specify the measurment point using numeric

key(s) and press the input key.
Message PUSH CYCLE START BUTTON
Number +
Start button
End
4-186
4. One-point measurement
Manual
JOG
JOG
Operation
1 POINT MEASURE
selected
Result
Message MOVE TO THE MEASURING POINT
Jog feed
One point
measurement
Indication of coordinate of the measured point

4-186-1
5. Two-point measurement
Manual
Manual
JOG
JOG
[1st point]
[2nd point]
JOG
JOG
Operation
2 POINT MEASURE
selected
Result
Jog feed
1st point
measurement
Indication of 1st measurement point coordinate

Jog feed
2nd point
measurement
Indication of 2nd measurement point coordinate

4-186-2
4-17-6
Mode and menu changeover

1. Function selector key
Function selector keys to be used during measurement are encircled below.
Function to be used in
manual mode (except MDI
mode)
Measurement impossible in this mode

(automatic mode).
Measurement cancelled if pressed during
measurement.
MDI mode to be used for straightness

measurement in automatic operation only.
In other cases, identical with automatic mode.
NM210-00447
(1) Manual mode

- All operation in the manual mode can be used during touch sensor
movement.
- With contact at measurement point, cutting feed key
only can be
used. If skip signal comes on in other modes, alarm will be caused.

(Measurement pattern is not cancelled.)
(2) TAPE, MEMORY mode (
- Measurement is not allowed in this mode. Alarm will be caused if the

pattern selection key is pressed.
- If TAPE, MEMORY mode is selected during measurement, the
measurement operation will be cancelled.
(3) MDI mode (
- This can be used only when mode change message is given in

straightness measurement. In other cases, identical with other automatic
operation modes.
4-187
2. Menu selection
The basic menu on the MEASURE display is shown below. The following
describes the menu selection in each mode.
D
CIRCLE
SURFACE
STRAIT.
1 POINT
STRAIT.
2 POINT
CLEAR
COPY
Display MEASURE MEASURE MEASURE MEASURE GRAPH MEASURE RESULT RESULT

selector
key
(1) Menu selection in manual mode

Display selector key D
.....
Menu selector key
.....
WRITE
Menu
selector
key
Charge to ordinary display menu.

Basic menu on the MEASURE
display cannot be called.
Return to measurement basic menu.
Pressing this on basic menu on the
MEASURE display will not cause
change.
(2) Menu selection in automatic mode

Identical with menu selection in manual mode
(3) Menu selection in MDI mode
Display selector key D
.....
Menu selector key
4-188
.....
Change to ordinary picture menu.

Basic menu on the MEASURE
display cannot be called.
Identical with menu selection on the
COMMAND display.
4-17-7
Data storage
1. Measurement result storage
Example:
After X straightness measured when 1: CIRCLE 2: X PLANE, subsequent
measurement will erase data for 1:, transfer data in 2: to 1:, and store
new data in 2:.
Indication will be as follows.
1: X PLANE
2: X STRAIT.
2. Data deletion
A. MES. POS.
- The coordinates of MES.POS. will be erased by two methods as follows.
1) Change display. (Measurement pattern will also be cancelled.)
2) Press either one of the menu keys of measurement pattern CIRCLE
MEASURE, SURFACE MEASURE, STRAIT. MEASURE, 1 POINT
MEASURE or 2 POINT MEASURE.
B. RESULT
The procedure for erasing the displayed measurement results is described
below.
[1] Press the menu key CLEAR RESULT on the MEASURE display.
- The message CLEAR MEASURING RESULT NO.? is displayed.
[2] Using numeric key, specify 1 or 2 that corresponds to the data number
of RESULT item to be erased and then press the input key
- Data of the selected number is erased.

- If the data of 1: is erased, data of 2: will not move to the field of
1: even when the data of 2: exists; data obtained by the next
measurement operation will move to the field of 1:. The order of
subsequent data movement is the same as that described previously in
item 1.
C. DISTANCE, ANGLE
Distance and angle data will also be erased upon erasing of measurement
results (RESULT).
4-17-8
Graph of straightness data

All measurement results will be indicated by numeric values on the
MEASURE display. In addition, straightness data will be graphically shown on
a line graph. The measurement results and graph can be copyed. This graph
is selected by pressing STRAIT. GRAPH on the basic menu of the
MEASURE display. It is explained below.
4-189
STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH display:
A-01
0.030
0.015
146.792
293.584
- 0.015
- 0.030
* * * STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH * * *
( )
COMMENT
MANUAL
MEASURE
PAR.
PERP.
DRAW
GRAPH 1
DRAW
GRAPH 2
M3S066
1. Initial state of the STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH display

This display is initialized as below according to measurement operation.
(1) Straightness measurement data not stored in either 1: or 2:
- Graph frame is only shown.
- No character is indicated.
(2) Straightness measurement data in either 1: or 2:
- Line is drawn on graph with horizontal axis passing start and end points of
straightness data.
- Dimensions are shown.
(3) Straightness data in both 1: and 2:
- Graph for data 2: will be drawn in a manner similar to (2) above.
2. Menu data function
Menu of the STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH display.
COMMENT
MANUAL
PAR.
DRAW
DRAW
MEASURE
PERP.
GRAPH 1
GRAPH 2
(1) MANUAL MEASURE

Direct return from the graph to the MEASUR display.
4-190
(2) PAR. PERP.

When surface, straightness measurement data in 1:, and straightness
measurement data in 2: and parallelism and straightness are calculable
between these two data, data 1: is taken as reference on horizontal axis,
on which graph for data 2: can be drawn. In other cases, this is not
available.
(3) DRAWN GRAPH 1, DRAWN GRAPH 2
DRAWN GRAPH 1 for showing the first straightness graph, and DRAWN
GRAPH 2 for the second straightness graph. If no data for straightness
measurement is specified, these are not available.
(4) COMMENT
Comment input is allowed with up to 11 characters of alphabet and
numerals at top right on the display.
3. Notes
(1) Vertical scale is two times the data scale (max).
(2) Graph coordinate system is identical with machine coordinate system with
(+) right direction of X-axis and (+) upward direction of Y-axis.
4-17-9
Five-surface machining option

Function:
The five-surface machining option allows you to perform circle measurements on
an X-Z plane and a Y-Z plane. It also allows measurement in a +Z direction.
Five-surface measurement
(1) Measurement results display
Five-surface measurement presents the following two types of circle
measurement results display:
X
Y
XY circle
YZ circle
M3S068
Note:
To which circle the particular measurement results relate is automatically
identified and displayed by the NC according to the direction of skipping done
during the measurement operation, and the corresponding coordinates.
4-191
(2) Mounting direction of a touch sensor tool

With the five-surface machining option, you can mount a touch sensor tool in
any of five directions. Measurements can be performed, irrespective of the
direction in which the touch sensor tool has been mounted.
Z
3
2
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
1
3
Z-axis surface measurement

(Possible with the touch sensor tool mounted in any of the five directions)
M3S069
(3) Measurements compensation

Five-surface measurement uses the following four types of compensation data:
- Touch sensor tool misalignment compensation (Parameter)
- Touch sensor tool measurements compensation (Parameter)
- Touch sensor tool length compensation (TOOL DATA display)
- Head compensation (HEAD DATA display)
The NC equipment automatically reads the head number, the direction of
measurement, and the direction of skipping, and thus performs appropriate
compensations, irrespective of what type of measurement takes place. The
following describes each type of compensations.
1) Touch sensor tool misalignment, measurements, and length compensations
Misalignment compensation and the measurements compensation must be
set as parameters. Five types of misalignment compensations are available
according to the particular head angle (mounting direction of the touch
sensor tool), whereas only one type of measurements compensation is
provided. The five-surface machining option uses the touch sensor tool
length compensations registered in the MAZATROL data.
- Measurements compensation
X-direction: Machine parameter L3
Y-direction: Machine parameter L4
- Alignment compensation. . . machine parameter
Head angle (Mounting direction of the touch sensor tool)
No head
V-direction
90
180
270
X-direction
L1
L84
L86
L88
L90
L92
Y-direction
L2
L85
L87
L89
L91
L93
4-192
* All parameter data is in 1/10000 mm.

* The X- or Y-direction at the head angle of 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees
refers to the X- or Y-direction existing in the MAZATROL five-surface
machining coordinate system.
x
y
X
z
y
x
x
x
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
X, Y, Z : Machine coordinate
system
x, y, z : MAZATROL five-surface
machining coordinate
system
MAZATROL five-surface machining coordinate system

M3S070
2) Head compensations
The five-surface machining option uses the data registered on the HEAD
DATA display.
Correction axis conversion takes place automatically according to the
current head angle.
4-17-10
Coordinates writing function

The coordinates writing function allows coordinate data to be written from the
MEASURE display into the fundamental coordinate units, work offsets, and/or
additional fundamental coordinates. The following describes the writing procedure.
Set the required data on the positions to
of the MEASURE display to apply
the function.
WNO
()
UNO
()
SNO
( )
X
Y
k
Z
4
5
6
Select where you want the coordinates to be

written.
Set the coordinates to be written. Writing can

be done only for the axes with specified
coordinates.
4-193
1. Writing position selection in , and

A. To write the coordinates into a fundamental coordinate (WPC) unit:
WNO
(9999)
UNO
(
1)
SNO
(--)
Move the cursor to the position ( ) of WNO.,

UNO. or SNO.
Set the machining program number using the
numeric keys and press the input key.
Set the fundamental coordinate unit number using
the numeric keys and press the input key.
No setting is required (It will be ignored even if
setting is done).
B. To write the coordinates into five-surface machining surface-sequence:

WNO
(9999)
UNO
1)
SNO
1)
Set the machining program number using the
numeric keys and press the input key.
Set the five-surface machining unit number using
the numeric keys and press the input key.
Set the five-surface machining surface-sequence
number using the numeric keys and press the input
key.
C. To write the coordinates into a work offset (WORK OFFSET DATA display):
WNO
(G54)
UNO
(--)
SNO
(--)
Select one from G54 to G59 on the menu*.
After you have selected one from G54 to G59, you
cannot move the cursor to the position (--) of
UNO. and SNO.
D. To write the coordinates into additional fundamental coordinates (ADDITIONAL WPC display):
WNO
( A)
UNO
(--)
SNO
(--)
Select one from A to K on the menu*.
After you have selected one from A to K, you
cannot move the cursor to the position (--) of
UNO. and SNO.
* The following menu is displayed if you have moved the cursor to WNO:
G54
G55
G56
G57
4-194
G58
G59
- To set the data required for specification of work offset or additional

fundamental coordinates, use the above and the following menu which can
be alternatively displayed by pressing the menu key:
C
2. Coordinates
You can input the required coordinates in this section either
- by copying the results of measurement (refer to 4-17-11), or
- by manually inputting the data.
Note that the coordinates copied or manually set here (for axis address X to
6) are to be written as they are into the respective item of the specified data
type.
A. Menu for coordinates setting
The following menu will be displayed when the cursor is placed on any one
of the coordinate data lines X to 6.
INCR.
ALL
CLEAR
(1) Setting for coordinates shifting (INCR. menu function)

You can set desired increments for the coordinates that have been set in
this section.
[1] Place the cursor onto the line of the axis whose data is to be
incremented.
[2] Press the menu key INCR.
- The display of INCR. will then be reversed in red.
And the message LENGTH TO ADD ? will be displayed.
[3] Set the required increment and press the input key
- The coordinate incremented by the specified value will be displayed

on the line maked with the cursor, and the red-highlighted status of
the menu will be cleared.
(2) Clearance of the entire writing data (ALL CLEAR menu function)
The data in the writing data registration area can be cleared either
- by clearing the data items marked with the cursor one by one with the
data cancellation key, or
- by clearing the entire data ( to ) with the menu function ALL CLEAR.
The procedure for applying the menu function is as follows:
[1] Place the cursor onto a coordinate item
area.
4-195
in the writing data registration
[2] Press the menu key ALL CLEAR.

- The display of ALL CLEAR will then be reversed in red.
And the message ALL SPACE CLEAR <INPUT> will be displayed.
- The entire data in the writing data registration area will then be
cleared, and the red-highlighted status of the menu will also be
cleared.
B. Precautions
- Do not set any unnecessary data for the axis whose data is not required to
be updated.
3. Writing operation
- The following describes the procedure for writing.
[1] Move the cursor to each item on the MEASURE display and set each data.
Example:
X
Y
k
Z
4
5
6
WNO
UNO
(9999) (
1)
300.001
350.002
0.001
400.003
SNO
)
[2] Press the menu key WRITE.

- This will cause the display status of WRITE to reverse.
- The data set in procedural step [1] will be written.

- Writing will be completed when the red-highlighted status of the menu is
cleared.
4. Precautions
- Writing cannot be done during the measurement mode.
- An alarm will result if the designated position (machining program, unit or
sequence) cannot be found.
- In case of coordinates writing for a WPC unit or five-surface machining
surface-sequence which has additional fundamental coordinates (A to K) or
work offset (G54 to G59) assigned, updating will be carried out, after
cancellation of the assignment, only for the data of the respective unit or
sequence (that is, not even for WPC-A to -K or G54 to G59).
4-196
4-17-11
Measurement results copying function

A menu function is provided for copying the measurement results into the writing
data registration area.
1. Copying procedure
[1] Select the item COPY RESULT from the basic menu on the MEASURE
display.
CIRCLE
SURFACE
STRAIT.
1 POINT
MEASURE MEASURE MEASURE MEASURE
STRAIT.
2 POINT
CLEAR
COPY
GRAPH
MEASURE
RESULT
RESULT
WRITE
- The menu display will be changed to the following menu for the results
copying function:
RESULT
RESULT
RESULT
RESULT
RESULT
RESULT
RESULT
RESULT
1-X
1-Y
1-Z
1-k
2-X
2-Y
2-Z
2-k
And the message RESULT TO COPY <MENU INPUT> will be

displayed.
[1] Select the menu item(s) indicating the data to be copied.
The item indications of the menu consist of the measurement No. (1 or 2)
on the left and the axis address (X to k) on the right of a hyphen. As many
items as required can be selected fere.
- The display of the selected menu item(s) will be reversed in red.
.
- The measurement results selected in procedural step [2] will now be
copied into the writing data registration area, and the red-highlighted
status of the menu will be cleared.
2. Precautions
- The selection of measurement result for an axis can simply be renewed by
pressing the menu key for the other item of the same axis (the reverse
display in the menu will be changed correspondingly).
- The copying operation will only be carried out for the menu-selected axes to
update the coordinates (all the other lines will remain as they were).
Note that a blank item (no measurement result) in the RESULT display
section, if menu-selected, will be copied as it is into the writing data
registration area.
4-197
Function overview
Touch sensor
MAZATROL
Measurement
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
4-18-1
Workpiece measurement printout system (Option)
Workpiece No.
Target value
Tolerance
judgment
Measurement
Target
End mill
Measured value
Error
Compensation
data
Compensation
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa aaaaaa
aaaaaa aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
4-18
Printout
Printer
M3S071
Target
NM210-00448
The workpiece measurement printout system has been developed to take

automatic measurements of hole and boss radius, groove and step width, center to
center distance, step differences and other distances between randomly selected
points, angles of slant and the like, and to provide printouts of the results of these
measurements.
When the printout is made, the system will compare the actual measured value
with the target value and judge whether or not the results fall within the tolerance
range. It will also output the results of this judgment. Further, it will also
automatically conduct tool data compensation when measurement is made of a
surface machined by an end mill.
These functions can be used by embedding a designation for calling a macro
program for the execution of workpiece measurement printout within normal
machining programs that have been written either in MAZATROL programming
language or in EIA/ISO code. This type of application will allow the preservation of
initial machining accuracy as well as the rapid discovery of any non-conforming
parts.
The optional function EIA/ISO code input must be present to use this system.
4-198
1. Measurement function
Random workpiece lengths or angles are measured by the touch sensor tool. A
wide variety of measurement patterns are available for selection. Patterns
available are described in the following charts.
Measurement
Measurement
patterns
Measurement group
A. Diameter/width measurement:
ID and OD
patterns
Designate center coordinate system

and target diameter and width.
X
B. Measurement between 2 random
points:
Any two points can be selected and
Groove center
Z surface
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
X and Y surfaces
Groove and
step center
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Step width
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
measurement. Depending on the type

of point combination selected,
measurement can be made for step
Groove width
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
measurement can be made between

them. For surface, groove or step
center, hole or boss center or corner
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Surface
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
step width
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Groove and
Outer diameter
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Inner diameter
Step center
difference, from center to center, and

between hole center and surface.
Hole and
boss center
Measurement of two points on the

surface and calculation of angle from
axis.
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaa
a
Outside corner
Angle of inclination
4-199
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aa
a
Outside and
inside corners
C. Slant measurements:
Boss center
a
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aa
a
Hole center
Inside corner
Angle can be measured from points on

the X and Y surface; the X and Z
surface; or the Y and Z surface.
M3S072
Examples of measurement between two randomly selected points:

X-surface to X-surface (step)
Step center X to X-surface
lx
lx
P2
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
P1
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
P1
P2
Hole center to hole center

Groove center X to groove center X
(distance between centers)
lx
lx
P1
P2
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Hole center to outside corner
ly
ly
Outside corner to outside corner

P2
P2
lr
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aa
aaaa
aa
aaaa
aa
aaaa
aa
aaaa
aa
aaaa
aa
aaaa
aa
aa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
P1
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
P2
lr
lr
P1
P1
ly
lx
lx
M3S073
- The number of machining cycles to be conducted between measurements is

designated by a parameter setting.
2. Tolerance judgment function
Upper tolerance
limit (u)
a
a
aa
a
a
aa
aa
aa
u-v
2
u-v
2
q
-q
u-v
2
u-v
2
Target value
Lower tolerance
limit (v)
M3S074
4-200
Tolerance judgments are conducted at three stages. These are the upper tolerance
limit (u), the lower tolerance limit (v) and the compensation range setting rate (q).
Notes:
1. The value of q is designated by an argument in the workpiece measurement
initial setting program (WNO. 9100).
2. The values of u and v are designated by arguments in the tolerance
judgment printout program (WNO. 91 5).
3. Range :
Tolerance judgment is OK and no compensation is necessary.
Range :
Tolerance judgment is OK but a alarm message will be printed
out.
If offset tool designation has been made, compensation will be
conducted towards the target value.
Range :
A tolerance over alarm will be given, and no compensation will be

made.
The target value will automatically be established to fall exactly in the middle of
the range established between the upper and lower tolerance limits.
Example:
ID measurement arguments X Y Z D100.
Tolerance judgment arguments U0.1 V0
100.05 is target value.
When q = 0.4
100.1
(+0.05)
100.07
(+0.02)
100.05
(Target value)
100.03
( 0.02)
100.
( 0.05)
z100
+ 0.1
0
M3S075
4-201
3. Compensation function
TOOL DATA display
PKNO.
TOOL
F-MILL
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
DRUM NO. 1
NOM-
ACT-
LENGTH
100.A
100.
100.
E-MILL
20.A
20.
100.
DRILL
10.
100.
E-MILL
10.A
10.
100.
5
6
7
Tool diameter
Tool length
TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE A) display
NO.
OFFSET
NO.
OFFSET
50.
17
0.
10.
18
0.
5.
19
0.
20.
20
0.
21
22
23
24
Offset data
Designation of the tool number and the offset number of the end mill that was used
on the measured surface allows compensation to be made in the relevant tool
diameter, tool length and offset data.
Compensation for OFFSET DATA can not be made when setting TOOL OFFSET in
type B. Designation of whether compensation is to be made to the TOOL DATA
value or to the TOOL OFFSET DATA value is made by parameter setting.
(1) Diameter and width measurement
Compensation direction is determined automatically. The system compares the
target value with the measured value, and makes compensation along the
minus direction if undercutting has been detected, and compensation along the
positive direction if overcutting has been detected.
4-202
(2) Measurement between 2 randomly selected points

The compensation direction cannot be determined automatically, and it is thus
necessary to supply an argument that can be used for selection. If no argument
has been supplied, compensation will be made along the positive direction. See
the explanations of the various programs for further details.
(3) Slant measurement
The compensation function is not available for this type of measurement.
Note:
Compensation for TOOL DATA value can be made only for C version and the
subsequent version of main software.
4. Printout function
The printout function can be controlled in any of three different ways, depending
on parameter settings. These are indicated below:
(1) Printout not required
This selection is made when the system is to be operated with the
measurement, tolerance judgment and compensation functions only, or when
printer failure or some other reason makes it impossible to use the printer.
Measurement results can be verified at the COMMON VARIABLE display if no
printout is to be made.
(2) Printout each measurement
This selection should be made if it is necessary to make a printout of every
measurement taken, regardless of results.
(3) Printout compensation
This selection should be made if it is necessary to print out only the results of
tolerance judgments when error has been found to fall within the compensation
range or to exceed tolerance. If this selection is made, however, the results of
the first measurement taken will be printed out regardless of results. (This
selection is controlled by the results of tolerance judgments, and has no
relationship to whether the offset tool designation is ON or OFF).
A maximum of eight items can be included in the printout for a single
measurement.
An example follows. (Example assumes metric input and surface point to
hole/boss center point measurement.)
4-203
Workpiece number, workpiece count

Target value, measurement pattern
...
....
RESULT OF MEASURING
WNO 5678 COUNT 1
MARK DATA FACE-HOL/BOS
60.000
Measured value, direction of
measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tolerance range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASURED DATA X 60.053

TOLERANCE 0.100
Error, tolerance judgment results
CHECK OK/WARNING 0.053
......
Compensation tool No. or
compensation offset No. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre-compensation tool data or
offset data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Post-compensation tool data or . . . . . . .
OFFSET NO. 30
OFFSET DATA 10.000
NEW OFFSET DATA 9.947
offset data
See Chapt. 4-18-7 Output of measurement results for further information on the
data that is printed out at this time.
4-18-2
System configurations
1. Hardware
5
1
6
2
7
8
Printer
No.
Part name
No.
Part name
M3S076
No.
Part name
Touch sensor tool
Signal check panel
MMS receiver
Pendant operation box
Signal cable
Printer cable
CRT display
NC unit (MAZATROL)
The workpiece measurement printout function is composed of the following

components: a touch sensor tool that is brought into contact with the measurement
surface; a MAZAK measuring system (MMS) receiver that receives contact signals
from the touch sensor; the MAZATROL NC unit, which reads coordinate values
when contact is made between the touch sensor and the measurement surface;
and a printer, which prints out the results of the measurement.
See the Programming manual, for further details on the touch sensor tool.
4-204
2. Printer
1
2
5
7
No.
Part name
NM210-00449
No.
Part name
Printer cover
Power connector
Paper cutter
Interface connector
PF switch
DIP switches
Power switch
The printer used in this system is an Epson P-40 printer, which is interfaced with
the NC unit using PTP/PTR connector.
(1) Principal specifications
Item
Description
Type of printing
Heat sensitive serial dot matrix printer
Printing speed
45 cps (for normal characters in 40 col. mode)
Lines per second
Approximately 1.2 lines per second
Paper for use
Epson thermal roll paper (P40TRP), thermal roll paper (luminous

black); width 112 mm/ roll length 11 meters
Power supply
Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and weight
46(H)x216(W)x128(D) mm, 650g
3-phase NiCd batteries

AC adaptor available
See the printer operating manual for a more detailed specifications.

(2) Setting of printer DIP switches and NC parameters
1) Set NC parameters as follows:
- F39 (port selection): Set 1 (macro-print).
- F41 (device selection): Set 1 (macro-print).
- G19 (PTP/PTR baud rate): Set the same value as that of the printer.
- G20 G23: Standard setting when shipping is maintained.
2) Set the printer DIP switches following the printer operation manual.
- Data length: 7 bit
- Parity: EVEN
- Baud rate: Set the same value as that of NC parameter G19.
4-205
4-18-3
Parameter registration
Before attempting to utilize the workpiece measurement printout function, it is
necessary to first register in the common variables the parameter settings which
designate the data management system to be used and the compensation amount
of touch sensor tool.
COMMON VARIABLE display:
NO.
DATA
NO.
DATA
NO.
DATA
NO.
#100
#101
#102
#113
#114
#115
#126
#127
#128
#139
#140
#141
#103
#104
#105
#116
#117
#118
#129
#130
#131
#142
#143
#144
#106
#107
#108
#119
#120
#121
#132
#133
#134
#145
#146
#147
#109
#110
#111
#112
#122
#123
#124
#125
#135
#136
#137
#138
#148
#150
DATA
* * * COMMON VARIABLE * * *
COMMON
VARIABLE
COMMON
CHECK
LOCAL
VARIABLE
LOCAL
CHECK
EXP
NEXT
PAGE
M3S077
Procedure for calling up the COMMON VARIABLE display:

[1] By depressing the menu selection key (green key positioned at the left side of
the menu key), the following menu will be indicated.
EIA/ISO
MODAL
INFORM.
INFORM.
ALARM
PROCESS
HARD
CONTROL
COPY
[2] By depressing the menu key EIA/ISO INFORM. the following menu will be
displayed.
TOOL
WORK
MACRO
TOOL
OFFSET
OFFSET
VARIABLE
LIFE
[3] By depressing the menu key MACRO VARIABLE, the COMMON VARIABLE
display will be shown automatically.
- By depressing the menu key NEXT PAGE, the display will be changed to the
next page. Move the cursor to where the data must be registered.
4-206
1. Data management system parameters

Item
Mesurement/cycle
Address
Value to register
#500
Register number of cycles in which measurement is

to be made. If #500 is set at 0, no measurement
will be made at all.
Printout categories
#501
0. = no printout
1. = printout each measurement
2. = printout first measurement, then subsequent
measurements if compensation is made or
tolerance level is exceeded
Compensation
categories
#502
0. = Conduct tool data compensation (Effective for C

version and the subsequent version)
1. = Conduct tool offset data compensation
Touch sensor tool
#503
number
Offset number
Tool number registration of touch sensor tool

Example:
Tool No. 15 : #503 = 15
#504
Set a touch sensor tool length offset register No.

Example:
Set a touch sensor tool length offset register No. at
macro variable #504, and input the touch sensor tool
length in the number. (Input value may be the same
as the touch sensor tool length given on the TOOL
DATA display.)
TOOL OFFSET display
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
OFFSET
0.
150.
0.
.
.
NO.
17
18
19
20
21
OFFSET
.
.
.
.
.
If offset register no. 2 is used at a touch sensor tool

length of 150, set the value 150 as shown above,
and besides set offset no. 2 at macro variable #504.
#504 = 2.
MAZATROL tool data
#510
Effective/Ineffective
ATC type
When the main version belongs to C version and

F93 bit1 (MAZATROL tool data tool length Effective)
is made effective, set #510 = 1.
Set #510 = 0. except the above.
#511
0 ... H-400 type

Model which requires 2nd zero point return (G30)
when designating a tool change
1 ... AJV type
Model which doesn't require 2nd zero point return
(G30) when designating a tool change
Touch sensor tool

nominal diameter
#554
Assuming nominal diameter of 5 mm:

Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . .
#554 = 2.5
Inch
4-207
..............
#554 = 0.0984
Refer to section 4-6-2 Tool data INVALIDATION (Option) for MAZATROL tool
data tool length/tool diameter Effective (in EIA/ISO program).
F92 bit 7 ON: MAZATROL tool data tool diameter Effective
F93 bit 3 ON: MAZATROL tool data tool length Effective
F94 bit 2 ON: Tool length compensation cancel is not performed by G28, G30.
(When F93 bit 3 is set to ON, be sure to set it to compensation cancel is not
performed.)
F84 bit 0 ON: Enter tool offset value into the counter by EIA/ISO.
2. Touch sensor tool compensation amount
2 Mx
Stylus ball contact circle center
2 My
ey
ex
A View
Tool shank center
M3S078
Eccentricity compensation values ex and ey and measurement compensation

valuesMx and My must be registered as common variables before any attempt
is made to use the touch sensor to measure a workpiece.
Execution of calibration measurement by the MAZATROL MMS (automatic
centering system) will cause these compensation amounts to be displayed as
parameter measurements at the Parameter display. Input the values displayed at
addresses L1 through L4 as common variables #550 through #553, respectively.
Parameter mesurement
Compensation amount
Address Metric
Eccentricity
compensation amount ex
Eccentricity
compensation amount ey
Measurement compensation amount
Mx
Measurement compensation amount
My
Parameter common variable
Inch
Address
Metric
Inch
L1
58
23
#550
0.0058
0.0023
L2
1690
67
#551
0.169
0.0067
L3
24150
9510
#552
2.415
0.0951
L4
24277
9590
#553
2.437
0.0959
See the M-32 Programming manual (Application) for further information on the
calibration measurement operation.
4-208
4-18-4
Program configuration
The workpiece measurement printout function is used by adding a macroprogram
call command to the main program. Before this program is called out, however, it is
necessary to designate the workpiece coordinate system.
Tool exchange commands for the touch sensor are executed by the workpiece
measurement initial setting program, and they do not have to be added to the main
program.
1. Coordinate system setting
Coordinate system setting for workpiece measurement should be made
according to the procedures used with the MAZATROL programming language.
In other words, the coordinate value for the Z-axis should be the distance from
the spindle nose at the machine zero position, and the length of the touch
sensor tool should be registered as tool data.
EIA/ISO program:
Set with codes G54 through G59 and G92.
MAZATROL program:
Set with basic coordinate unit. However, k values
will not be effective. It should also be noted that the
miscellaneous coordinate unit will also be ineffective.
2. Macro program calls
EIA/ISO program: Use G65 user macro unmodal call
G65!P!WNO! ! !
! ! !;
Argument
data
Argument
address
MAZATROL program:
UNO
XX
UNIT
SUBPRO
Use subprogram unit
WORK NO. REPEAT

WNO.
ARGM 1
!
Argument
address
ARGM 2
!
ARGM 3
!
ARGM 4
!
ARGM 5
!
Argument
data
The argument data are effective down to four decimal places. Any fraction will
be rounded off to four decimal places.
4-209
3. Macro program
The workpiece measurement printout system is made up of the 15
macroprograms indicated in the following table. The program necessary for the
measurement pattern to be executed should be selected.
Group
Work No.
Type of measurement
Argument address
Initial setting
9100
Workpiece measurement initial

setting
WRKQ
Measurement A
(Diameter and width)
9110
ID/OD measurement
MXYZD
9111
Groove/step width
MXYZD
measurement
Measurement B
(Measurement between two
random points)
9115
Tolerance judgment printout A
9120
Surface measurement
9121
Groove center/step center
UVS
MXYZ
MXYZD
measurement
Measurement C (Slant)
Sub-routines
9122
Hole center/boss center

measurement
MXYZD
9123
Corner measurement
MXYZI
9125
Tolerance judgment printout B
EUVSB
9130
Slant measurement
FMXYZ
9135
Tolerance judgment printout C
9140
Data check sub-routine
9141
Measurement movement subroutine
9142
IAUV
Tolerance judgment and

compensation sub-routine
9145
Printout sub-routine
The initial setting program (Work No. 9100) is always necessary when using the
work measurement function. Select the desired measurement pattern from
measurement groups A, B or C. The tolerance judgment printout program (Work
No. 91 5) should be the one from the group from which the measurement
pattern has been selected. Sub-routines are used within the system, and cannot
be directly used in a user program.
(1) Diameter and width measurement
Measurement Group A
9100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Workpiece measurement initial setting
9110, 9111 . . . . . . . . . . .
Diameter or width measurement
9115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-210
Tolerance judgment printout A
(2) Measurement between 2 random points

Measurement Group B
9100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9120, 9121, 9122, 9123 . .
Measurement point 1 coordinate value
9120, 9121, 9122, 9123 . .
Measurement point 2 coordinate value
9125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tolerance judgment printout B
A total of 10 different combinations is possible for workpiece numbers 9120 through
9123, depending on the designation of arguments at measurement points 1 and 2.
No.
Program
Measurement pattern
Direction
Compensation
setting (Note 1)
X, Y, Z
combination
1
9120 - 9120
Surface to surface
9120 - 9121
Surface to groove/step center
X, Y
9120 - 9122
Surface to hole/boss center
X, Y
9120 - 9123
Surface to corner
X, Y
9121 - 9121
Groove/step center to
X, Y
X, Y
groove/step center
6
9121 - 9122
Groove/step center to hole/boss

center
9121 - 9123
Groove/step center to corner
X, Y
9122 - 9122
Hole/boss center to hole/boss

center
X, Y, R
(Note 2)
9122 - 9123
Hole/boss center to corner
X, Y, R
(Note 2)
10
9123 - 9123
Corner to corner
X, Y, R
(Note 2)
Notes:
1. The following symbols are used in this chart:
} : All measurement systems can be compensated
{ : Center measurement taken as standard for compensation
: Compensation designation not possible
2. X, Y and R (=
X2 + Y2) tolerance judgment printouts can be selected for
each measurement at Nos. 8, 9 and 10. (More than one printout is also
possible.)
Measurement Group B
9100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9122, 9123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-211

Measurement point 1; hole/boss center or
corner coordinate values measurement
9122, 9123
9125 (X)
9125 (Y)
9125 (R)
..............
................
................
................
Measurement point 2; hole/boss center or

corner coordinate values measurement
X-axis direction tolerance judgment printout B
Y-axis direction tolerance judgment printout B
Distance on X-Y surface
X2 + Y2) tolerance judgment printout B
(R =
(3) Slant measurements

Measurement Group C
9100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9130, 9135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Slant measurement; tolerance judgment printout C (always pair these two)
(4) Multiple group measurements

- It is possible to designate measurements to be made from each group (A, B,
and C) within the same main program. In such cases, the workpiece
measurement initial setting program is necessary only once, at the beginning.
9100
9100
9100
Measurement A1
Measurement A
Measurement A1
Measurement A2
Measurement B
Measurement B
Measurement A3
Measurement C
Measurement A2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Workpiece measurement will be discontinued if an alarm is generated as a result of

tolerance judgment.
- Group B measurements are normally composed of a cycle containing three
programs:
1) Measurement point 1 coordinate value measurement
2) Measurement point 2 coordinate value measurement
3) Tolerance judgment printout
When more than one location is being measured, however, and one
measurement point is to be duplicated, it is possible to make tolerance
judgments from only one coordinate value measurement from the second
measuring cycle on.
4-212
9100
9120 - 9123 . . . .
9120 - 9123 . . . .
Measurement point 1 (P1) coordinate value measurement

9125 . . . . . . . . .
Printout of tolerance judgment between points P1 and P2
B2
9120 - 9123 . . . .
9125 . . . . . . . . .

B3
9120 - 9123 . . . .
9125 . . . . . . . . .

B1
P2 {
B1
B2
P1 {
B3
P1
P2
- When machining is executed between measuring cycles:

9100
Measurement A1
Machining
cycle
9100
WNO. 9100 includes the touch sensor automatic tool

change function as well as the workpiece count function,
and for this reason argument Ww (normally this is the
workpiece number) should be set at 0 for the second
and all subsequent instances of 9100, so that the count
function will not be executed. Other arguments are
unnecessary if they are unchanged from the initial 9100
appearance, although it is also possible to change their
settings.
WO
Measurement A2
(5) Examples for calling up a macroprogram

EIA/ISO programs
G54;
Coordinate system setting
G65P9100W1200R5K3.Q0.5.;
G65 P9110 M101.X200.
Y200.Z-5.D100.;
G65P9115U0.1V-0.1S2.;
Workpiece offset
X
Y
Z
4
G54
360.
450.
600.
0
Work measurement initial setting

Measurement (example is ID)
Tolerance judgment, printout
Note:
G90/G91 and F-code modal information is updated according to workpiece measurement.
4-213
MAZATROL program language program
UNO
UNIT
XX
4-18-5
WPC-
UNO
UNIT
XX
SUBPRO
UNO
UNIT
XX
SUBPRO
UNO
UNIT
XX
SUBPRO
360.
450.
k0
600
WORK NO. REPEAT ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5

9100
W1200.
R5.
K3.
Q0.5

9110
M101.
X200.
Y200.
Z-5.
D100.

9115
U0.1
V-0.1
S2.
Explanations of programs
1. Workpiece measurement initial setting (WNO. 9100)
This program is responsible for the designation of common data to be used in
workpiece measurement, the initializing of common variables, workpiece
counting management and the automatic tool change operation for the touch
sensor. It should always be called out immediately before the beginning of any
measuring movement.
EIA/ISO
G65
P9100
Ww
Rr
Kk
Qq
MAZATROL
UNO
XX
UNIT
SUBPRO
WORK NO.
9100
REPEAT
1
ARGM 1
Ww
ARGM 2
Rr
ARGM 3
Kk
Ww . .
ARGM 4
Qq
ARGM 5
Workpiece number of main program

Example:
4078 Printout
WNO 4078 COUNT 10
MARK DATA HOL/BOS DIA 100.000
MEASURED DATA R 100.799
However, if this is used in two or more locations in the main program,
the setting for the second and all subsequent times should be W=0.
Note:
For inch specifications, when calling up a macroprogram from a mazatrol
Rr . . .
Kk
Qq
..
..
program, a workpiece number of four digits cannot be assigned to

argument W. Set either a workpiece number of three digits or less, or
any code.
Initial point Z used for measurement movement (workpiece coordinate
value)
Measurement feed amount (positive value)
Compensation field setting rate (0 to 1.0)
4-214
- Set range that will not result in compensation conducted as tolerance width 1.0.
- All argument data should contain decimal points.
With the exception of cases in which W = 0 the counter will advance by 1 each
time the program is called up, and the counter will automatically be cleared to 0
when the workpiece number (value w) changes. If it is necessary to clear the
counter to 0 without changing workpiece numbers, set common variables #135
and #136 to 0.
- Ww designates a workpiece number, but no check is made to ensure that this
does not differ from the actual workpiece number. This is used in the heading
section of the printout, so it is also possible to use a different code setting at the
user's discretion.
- After an automatic tool change has been conducted for the touch sensor,
positioning will be made to the point designated by Rr and after this is done
feed will be made at a rate of 3000 mm/min (or 120 inch/min). The measurement
feed rate is made as a parameter setting (K41: G31 skip feed). Because
measurement is normally made successively, after one measurement cycle has
been completed, return is made to point R, which means that a zero return
command should be made after the final measurement has been completed (see
the various measurement programs).
- Measurement feed amount Kk is not calculated from the center of the spindle,
but rather represents the distance from the tip of the probe to the surface to be
measured.
k
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
This data is not effective during slant measurement.
#554 (nominal radius of probe)
X, Y directions
Z direction
M3S079
When performing slant measurement, set the measurement start point in such a
way that it will be within 15 mm (0.6 inch) of the measurement point.
4-215
2. Inner diameter and outer diameter measurements (WNO. 9110)

Diameters are calculated by the measurement of four points on a circle.
Measurement is made first along the X-axis, then along the Y-axis.
EIA/ISO
G65
P9110
Mm
Xx
Yy
Zz
Dd
MAZATROL
UNO
XX
UNIT
SUBPRO
WORK NO.
9110
REPEAT
1
ARGM 1
Mm
ARGM 2
Xx
ARGM 3
Yy
ARGM 4
Zz
ARGM 5
Dd
Mm . .
Measurement pattern:
(1) m = 1.: ID measurement
(2) m = 2.: OD measurement
(3) m = 3.: ID measurement II
If a zero point return operation is to be made after all measurement operations
have been completed, these values should all be added to 100. and, then, set
as follows: m = 101.; m = 102.; m = 103.
Xx . . .
Yy . .
Zz . .
Dd . .
Center point of circle, X coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Center point of circle, Y coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)
Measurement point, Z coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)
ID/OD target value
All argument data should contain decimal points.
4-216
> Measurement operations

m = 1.
ID measurement
m = 2.
OD measurement
Workpiece zero point
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
d
M3S082
m = 3.
M3S083
ID measurement II
> Measurement pattern is determined in

x
accordance with the value of argument m

as shown in the accompanying diagrams.
- The values of r and k are designated
in the workpiece measurement initial
setting program (WNO. 9100).
- ID measurement II is used when there is a
step within a circle, such as in PCKT MT
machining.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aa
aaaa
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
aa
a
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
r
z
k
d
M3S084
4-217
3. Groove width and step width measurements (WNO. 9111)

Groove and step width are calculated by measuring both ends of the groove or
step section (along either the X-axis or the Y-axis direction).
EIA/ISO
G65
P9111
Mm
Xx
Yy
Zz
Dd
MAZATROL
UNO
XX
UNIT
SUBPRO
WORK NO.
9111
REPEAT
1
ARGM 1
Mm
ARGM 2
Xx
ARGM 3
Yy
ARGM 4
Zz
ARGM 5
Dd
Mm . .
Measurement pattern:
(1) m = 1.:
X-axis groove width measurement
(2) m = 2.:
Y-axis groove width measurement
(3) m = 3.:
(4) m = 4.:
X-axis step width measurement

Y-axis step width measurement
If a zero point return operation is to be made after all measurement operations

have been completed, add 100 to these values and, then, set as follows:
m = 101.; m = 102.; m = 103; m = 104.
Xx . . .
When m = 1. or 3.:
When m = 2. or 4.:
Yy
..
When m = 1. or 3.:
Center of groove/step, X coordinate (workpiece

coordinate value)
Measurement point X coordinate (workpiece
coordinate value)
Measurement point Y coordinate (workpiece
coordinate value)
When m = 2. or 4.:
Zz
Dd
..
..
Center of groove/step, Y coordinate (workpiece

coordinate value)
Measurement point, Z coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)
Groove or step width target value
4-218
a
aa
aa
aa
a a
aa
aa
aa
a
z
z
X-axis step width measurement

m = 4.
4-219
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
m = 2.
a
aa
aa
aa
a a
aa
aa
aa
a
aaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa
X-axis groove width measurement
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
a
aa
aa
aa
a
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
m = 3.
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
a
aa
aa
aa
a
m = 1.
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
- Measurement operations
Y-axis groove width measurement
r
r
d
k
M3S085
Y-axis step width measurement
M3S086
- Values of r and k are designated in the workpiece measurement initial setting

program (WNO. 9100).
4. Tolerance judgment printout A (WNO. 9115)
This program compared the results of the measurements of inner diameters,
outer diameters, groove widths and step widths with the target values; makes a
tolerance judgment on the basis of this comparison, and prints out the results of
this judgment. Tool diameter compensation can also be made, depending on
the amount of error in measured values in respect to the target values.
EIA/ISO
G65
P9115
Uu
Vv
Ss
MAZATROL
UNO
XX
UNIT
SUBPRO
WORK NO.
9115
REPEAT
1
ARGM 1
Uu
ARGM 2
Vv
Uu
Vv
..
..
ARGM 3
Ss
ARGM 4
ARGM 5
Upper tolerance limit

Lower tolerance limit
If measurement results are to be printed out without the performance of a

tolerance judgment, the setting of these first two values should be u = v = 0.
Ss
..
The Tool No. or Offset No. for which compensation is to be made.
- Designation in a case where compensation category #502 = 0. and tool

number is to be set:
Example:
Tool No. 20
S = 20.
(Since compensation is made for the currently effective drum, the drum number
has no meaning.)
- Designation in a case where compensation category #502 = 1. and offset
Exemple:
Offset No. 20
S = 20.
- If compensation is unnecessary or not possible, make no input for Ss or set

at S = 0.
5. Surface measurement (WNO. 9120)
This program allows measurement between random surface workpiece
coordinate points. It is combined with other measurement patterns to calculate
distance to the surface.
EIA/ISO
G65
P9120
Mm
Xx
Yy
Zz
MAZATROL
UNO
XX
UNIT
SUBPRO
WORK NO.
9120
REPEAT
1
ARGM 1
Mm
ARGM 2
Xx
ARGM 3
Yy
4-220
ARGM 4
Zz
ARGM 5
Mm . .
Measurement point categories, measurement pattern (designated with

three digits: ).
Hundreds integer: Establishes zero return category
0: R-point return after measurement operation is completed
1: Zero position return after measurement operation is completed
Tens integer: Establishes measurement point category
1: Measurement point 1
2: Measurement point 2
Ones integer: Establishes measurement pattern
1: X surface measurement, measurement feed
2: X surface measurement, measurement feed
3: Y surface measurement, measurement feed
4: Y surface measurement, measurement feed
5: Z surface measurement, measurement feed
Xx . . .
Yy . .
Zz . .
+X
X
+Y
Y
Z
Measurement point X coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Measurement point Y coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)
Measurement point Z coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

- Measurement patterns (m1 corresponds to the ones integer of argument m)
Y
Z
m1=4.
m1=5.
X
m1=1.
m1=2.
-Z
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
-Y
-X
+X
+Y
m1=3.
M3S087
4-221
Workpiece zero
position
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Workpiece
zero
position
Z surface
X, Y surface (in the case of +X)
z
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaa
z
k
M3S088
Values of r and k are designated in the workpiece measurement initial setting

6. Groove center and step center measurement (WNO. 9121)
This program measures both edges of grooves and step sections (in the X-axis
or Y-axis direction) and calculates the central coordinates of the groove or step
section from these measurements. It is combined with other measurement
patterns to calculate the distance to the groove or step section center.
EIA/ISO
G65
P9121
Mm
Xx
Yy
Zz
Dd
MAZATROL
UNO
XX
UNIT
SUBPRO
WORK NO.
9121
REPEAT
1
ARGM 1
Mm
ARGM 2
Xx
ARGM 3
Yy
ARGM 4
Zz
4-222
ARGM 5
Dd
Mm . .

three digits: ).
Hundreds integer: Establishes zero return category (identical to surface
measurement)
Tens integer: Establishes measurement point category (identical to
surface measurement)
Ones integer: Establishes measurement pattern:
1:
2:
3:
4:
X-axis groove center measurement

Y-axis groove center measurement
X-axis step center measurement
Y-axis step center measurement
Xx . . .
For measurement patterns 1 and 3: Groove/step center X coordinate
Yy
..
(workpiece coordinate value)

For measurement patterns 2 and 4: Measurement point X coordinate
For measurement patterns 1 and 3: Measurement point Y coordinate
For measurement patterns 2 and 4: Groove/step center Y coordinate
Zz
Dd
..
..
Measurement point Z coordinate

Groove width, step section width
4-223
(m1 corresponds to the ones integer in argument m)
m1 = 1.
X-axis groove center measurement
m1 = 2.
Y-axis groove center measurement
aaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
M3S089
X-axis step section center measurement
m1 = 4.
Y-axis step section center measurement
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
a
a
a
aaa
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
a
a
aa
aa
a
a
aa
aa
aa
a a
aa
aa
a
a
aa
a a
aa
a
aa
aa
aa
a aaa
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
m1 = 3.
M3S090
4-224

7. Hole center and boss center measurement (WNO. 9122)
This program calculates center coordinates (X and Y) by the measurement of
four points on a circle. Measurement is made first along the X-axis, then along
the Y-axis. It is combined with other measurement patterns to calculate the
distance to a hole or boss center.
EIA/ISO
G65
P9122
Mn
Xx
Yy
Za
Dd
MAZATROL
UNO
XX
UNIT
SUBPRO
WORK NO.
9122
REPEAT
1
ARGM 1
Mm
ARGM 2
Xx
ARGM 3
Yy
ARGM 4
Zz
Mm . .
ARGM 5
Dd

three digits: ).
measurement)
surface measurement)
1: Hole center measurement
2: Boss center measurement
3: Hole center measurement II (movement to initial point)
Xx . . .
Yy . .
Circle center X coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Circle center Y coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)
Zz
Dd

Inner diameter/Outer diameter
..
..
4-225
(m1 corresponds to the ones integer in argument m)
4-226
m1 = 1.
Hole center measurement
m1 = 2.
Boss center measurement
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
M3S082
m1 = 3.
Hole center measurement II
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
a
aa
aa
aa
a
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
r
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
M3S083
> Measurement pattern is determined in
aa
a
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
k
d
M3S084
4-227
accordance with the value of argument

m1 as shown in the accompanying diagrams.
- The values of r and k are designated
in the workpiece measurement initial
setting program (WNO. 9100).
- Hole center measurement II is used when
there is a step within a circle, such as in
PCKT MT machining.
8. Outside and inside corner measurement (WNO. 9123)

This program performs continuous measurement along the X surface and Y
surface to calculate the corner coordinate value (X and Y). It is used in
combination with other measurement patterns to calculate the distance to the
corner.
EIA/ISO
G65
P9123
Mn
Xx
Yy
Za
Ii
MAZATROL
UNO
XX
UNIT
SUBPRO
WORK NO.
9123
REPEAT
1
ARGM 1
Mm
ARGM 2
Xx
ARGM 3
Yy
ARGM 4
Zz
Mm . .
ARGM 5
Ii
three digits: ).
measurement)
surface
measurement)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Xx . . .
Yy . .
Zz . .
Ii . . . .
Outside corner; measurement direction +X, +Y

Outside corner; measurement direction X, +Y
Outside corner; measurement direction X, Y
Outside corner; measurement direction +X, Y
Inside corner; measurement direction X, Y
Inside corner; measurement direction +X, Y
7: Inside corner; measurement direction +X, +Y

8: Inside corner; measurement direction X, +Y
Corner X coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)
Corner Y coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)
Distance from corner to measurement point (plus value)

- Measurement patterns
(m1 corresponds to the ones integer of argument m)
Outside Corner
m1=1.
a
a
aa
a
a
aa
aa
aa
m1=2.
m1=8.
m1=7.
m1=5.
m1=6.
a
a
a
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
aa
aa
a
m1=3.
a
a
a
a
a
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
m1=4.
Inside Corner
M3S091
4-228
Outside Corner
(in the case of m1 = 1.)
Workpiece
zero positon
Y
y
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aa
Inside Corner
(in the case of m1 = 8.)
Workpiece
zero positon
i
x
aa
z
k
i
M3S092

9. Tolerance judgment printout B (WNO. 9125)
This program compares the distances between measurement point 1 and
measurement point 2 as measured in combination with coordinate value
measurements (WNO. 9120 through 9123) with the target values; makes a
tolerance judgment on the basis of this comparison, and prints out the results of
this judgment. Tool diameter and tool length compensation can also be made,
depending on the amount of error in measured values in respect to the target
values.
EIA/ISO
G65
P9125
Ee
Uu
Yy
Ss
Bb
MAZATROL
UNO
XX
UNIT
SUBPRO
WORK NO.
9125
REPEAT
1
ARGM 1
Ee
ARGM 2
Uu
ARGM 3
Vv
ARGM 4
Ss
4-228
ARGM 5
Bb
Ee . .
Distance and axis direction designations
e = 1.: Distance along X-axis
e = 2.: Distance along Y-axis
e = 3.:
Distance along Z-axis
e = 4.:
Uu
Vv
..
..
Distance from X-Y surface (|X2 + Y2)

Upper tolerance limit
Lower tolerance limit
If measurement results are to be printed out without the performance of a

tolerance judgment, the setting of these first two values should be u = v = 0.
Ss
..
The Tool No. or Offset No. for which compensation is to be made.

- Designation in a case where compensation category #502 = 0. and tool
Example:
Tool No. 20 S = 20.
(Since compensation is made for the currently effective drum, the drum
number has no meaning.)
- Designation in a case where compensation category #502 = 1 and
offset number is to be set:
Example:
Offset No. 20 S = 20.
Bb
- If compensation is unnecessary or not possible, make no input for Ss

or set at S = 0.
..
Compensation amount conversion coefficient
This data is effective only when compensation is made. If no input is
made, it will be treated as b = 1..
4-229
- Compensation operation
b = -1.
Inner compensation as seen from reference point
Diameter compensation tool
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Measured distance
Reference
coordinate value
Coordinate
value to be
compensated
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
Reference coordinate value
Coordinate value
to be compensated
Coordinate value
to be compensated M3S093
Reference
coordinate value
b = -0.5
Inner compensation on both surfaces
M3S094
Outer compensation on both surfaces
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
Coordinate value
to be compensated
Tool compensation tool
Tool compensation tool
b = 0.5
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aa
Reference
coordinate
value
Measured distance
Measured distance
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
X or Y
Diameter
compensation
tool
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Outer compensation as seen from reference point
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
b = 1.
Measured distance
M3S095
4-230
M3S096
10. Slant measurement and tolerance judgment printout C (WNO. 9130/9135)

This program measures two points on the workpiece surface and calculates the
angle of slant in respect to the surface axis; compares the results to a target
value to make a tolerance judgment, and prints out the result of this judgment.
EIA/ISO
MAZATROL
G65
P9130
F1
Mm
Xx
Yu
Zz
G65
P9135
Ii
Aa
Uu
Vv
UNO
XX
UNIT
SUBPRO
WORK NO.
9130
REPEAT
1
ARGM 1
Ff
ARGM 2
Mm
ARGM 3
Xx
ARGM 4
Uy
ARGM 5
Zz
UNO
XX
UNIT
SUBPRO
WORK NO.
9135
REPEAT
1
ARGM 1
Ii
ARGM 2
Aa
ARGM 3
Uu
ARGM 4
Vv
ARGM 5
Ff . . .
Selection of surface
f = 1.: X-Y surface angle measurement
f = 2.: X-Z surface angle measurement
f = 3.: Y-Z surface angle measurement
Mm . .
Designation of measurement direction
m = 1.: Measurement feed direction is +X
m = 2.: Measurement feed direction is X
The above two settings cannot be made when f = 3.
m = 3.:
m = 4.:
Measurement feed direction is +Y

Measurement feed direction is Y
The above two settings cannot be made when f = 2.

m = 5.: Measurement feed direction is Z
The above setting cannot be made when f = 1.
When a zero return is to be performed after the measurement operation has been
completed, add 100 to each of the above settings and set as follows:
m = 101.; m = 102.; m = 103.; m = 104.; m = 105.
Xx . . .
Yy . .
Zz . .
Ii . . . .
Measurement starting point X coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Measurement starting point Y coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)
Measurement starting point Z coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)
Movement amount in axial direction from measurement point 1 to
Aa
measurement point 2
The movement axis is automatically determined according to the
combination of f (surface) and m (measurement direction)
arguments.
Target angle (degrees): Set at 45. e a e 45. (see Note below)
..
Axis and angle are both automatically determined according to the

combination
arguments.
of
4-231
(surface)
and
(measurement
direction)
f:
Surface
m:
Measurement
direction
i:
Movement
amount
a:
Target angle
f = 1.
X-Y surface
m = 1,2
X-axis
Y-axis
Angle with
Y-axis
m = 3,4
Y-axis
X-axis
Angle with
X-axis
m = 1,2
X-axis
Z-axis
Angle with
Z-axis
m=5
Z-axis
X-axis
Angle with
X-axis
m = 3,4
Y-axis
Z-axis
Angle with
Z-axis
m=5
Z-axis
Y-axis
Angle with
Y-axis
f = 2.
X-Z surface
f = 3.
Y-Z surface
Uu
..
Upper tolerance limit (degrees)
Vv
..
Lower tolerance limit (degrees)
If tolerance check is not necessary, set as u = v = 0

Note:
If angle is greater than 45 degrees, change measurement direction to measure.
Example:
lx
60
f=1.
X
m=4.
a=60.
Angle with Y-axis = 30 deg.
60
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Angle with X-axis = 60 deg.
ly
30
m=1.
a=30.
M3S097
4-232
a
a
a
a
a
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaa
(i>0)
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaa
(a>0)
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
P2
P1
Measurement point
15 mm
(0.6 inch)
Measurements on X and Y axes
4-233
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaa
When f = 1. and m = 3.
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaa
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
When f = 2. and m = 5.
Workpiece
zero position
x
Workpiece
zero position
P2
P1
(i>0)
z
r
(a<0)
M3S098
M3S099
- The measurement start point should be set within 15 mm (0.6 inch) of the
measurement point.
Measurement point
Start point
15 mm
(0.6 inch)
Measurements on Z axis
M3S100
i (+)
i (+)
Measurement
direction
P2
m = 3.
+Y
m = 4.
Y
i
a
P1
P1
4-234
i
P2
P2
P1
i
P2
a (+)
P2
P1
j
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aa
aa
aaaaaaaaaa
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
+X
aaaaaaaaaaaa
a (-)
P1
iji
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
m = 2.
P1
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
m = 1.
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
a
a
a
a
aa
aa
aa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
P1
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
P2
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
- The value assigned to l i l should be as large as possible.

The coordinate value of measurement starting point 2 is automatically determined
according to the measurement starting point, the axis movement amount and the
target angle. It is therefore especially important to take care about signs of axis
movement amount i and target angle a.
P1
P1
P2
a (+)
P2
a (-)
a (-)
i (-)
a>0
P2
P1
i (-)
M3S101
- Defining the measured angle

(1) f = 1.; X-Y surface
a<0
j
P1
P2
i
P1
P2
P2
M3S102
m = 2.
X
m = 5.
Z
tan-1
P2
P1
P1
4-235
P2
P1
P2
i
a
j
P1
P2
direction
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
i
aaaaaaaaaaaaa
Measurement
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
+X
m = 1.
P1 is the measurement start point designated by arguments x y and z.

P2 is determined automatically according to the values of arguments i and a.
In the above example, i > 0, but if the relationship were i < 0, then the positions
of P1 and P2 would be reversed.
The measured angle is determined by the following equation:
j
tan-1
i
(j: measurement point 2 coordinate value measurement point 1 coordinate value)
(2) f = 2.; X-Z surface
a>0
a<0
j
j
P2
P1
i
P1
P2
M3S103

j
i
m = 5.
Z
P1
4-236
a>0
P1
P2
P2
j
P2
a
P1
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
P1
P1
P2
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
P2
aaaaaa
aaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
Measurement
direction
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
m = 4.
Y
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
m = 3.
+Y
(3) f = 3.; Y-Z surface
a<0
j
i
P1
P2
M3S104


j
tan-1
i
Program and measurement pattern chart

Group
WORK No.
9110
Measurement Patterns (m1)
2.
3.
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
1.
ID
ID
OD
M3S104
9111
X groove width Y groove width
X step width
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
4.
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
3.
aaaaa
aaaaa
2.
aaaaaaaaaa
1.
Y step width
M3S105
9120
4. -Y
1. +X
2. -X
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa aaaa
aaaa aaaa
aaaa aaaa
aaaa aaaa
aaaa aaaa
aaaa aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
5. -Z
3. +Y
M3S106
9121
X groove center Y groove center
X step center
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
4.
aaaaaaaaaaaa
3.
aaaaa
2.
aaaaa
1.
aaaaa
Y step center
M3S107
9122
1.
2.
3.
Boss center
Hole center
a
aa
a
aa
aa
a
aaaaaaaaaaaa
4-18-6
Hole center
M3S108
4-237
Group No.
9123
Measurement Patterns (m1)
3.
8.
7.
5.
6.
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
aaaaaaaaaaaaa
4.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Group
1.
2.
Outside corner
Inside corner
M3S109
9130
f=1.
(9135)
f=2.
f=3.
Z
1.
Z
1.
4.
3.
5.
3.
2.
5.
2.
X
X-Y surface
4.
X
X-Z surface
Y
Y-Z surface
1, 2: angle with Y-axis 1, 2: angle with Z-axis 3, 4: angle with Z-axis

3, 4: angle with X-axis
5: angle with X-axis
5: angle with Y-axis
M3S110
4-238
4-18-7
Output of measurement results

1. Contents of printout
The contents of the printout are automatically controlled by the type of data
processing system being used. A maximum of 8 items can be included in one
print cycle.
Format (Differs by contents of the printout)
Millimeter:
Inch:
Integer: up to four figures;

Decimal: down to three decimal places.
Integer: up to four figures;
Decimal: down to four decimal places.
(1) Workpiece No. and workpiece count

The workpiece number and workpiece count number designated by the
argument W of initialized workpiece measurement (WNO. 9100) are printed.
An example follows:
WNO 1234 COUNT 1
(2) Target values
The printout includes a comment which indicates the automatically calculated
target value (MARK DATA) and the measurement pattern. The format of this
comment is indicated in the following table:
Measurement pattern
Comment
Inner diameter/outer diameter
MARK DATA HOL/BOS DIA
Groove/step width
MARK DATA GRV/STP WIDTH
Surface to surface
MARK DATA FACE-FACE
Surface to groove/step center
MARK DATA FACE-GRV/STP
Surface to hole/boss center
Surface to corner
MARK DATA FACE-CNR
Groove/step center to groove/step center
MARK DATA GRV/STP-GRV/STP
Groove/step center to hole/boss center
MARK DATA GRV/STP-HOL/BOS
Groove/step center to corner
MARK DATA GRV/STP-CNR
Hole/boss center to hole/boss center
MARK DATA HOL/BOS-HOL/BOS
Hole/boss center to corner
MARK DATA HOL/BOS-CNR
Corner to corner
MARK DATA CNR-CNR
X-Y surface slant
MARK DATA SLANT X-Y
X-Z surface slant
MARK DATA SLANT X-Z
Y-Z surface slant
MARK DATA SLANT Y-Z
4-239
(3) Measured values

The actually measured lengths and angles are also printed in the comments
according to the format shown below.
Length
Angle
Comment
Length on X-axis
Angle with X-axis
MEASURED DATA X
Length on Y-axis
Angle with Y-axis
MEASURED DATA Y
Length on Z-axis
Angle with Z-axis
MEASURED DATA Z
ID/OD or X-Y surface

length (|X2+Y2)
MEASURED DATA R
(4) Tolerance ranges

The following value is printed out:
(upper tolerance limit lower tolerance limit) / 2.
The example below assumes an upper tolerance limit of u = 0.3 and a lower
tolerance limit of v = 0:
TOLERANCE 0.150
(5) Error and judgment
The value representing measured value target value is printed, along with
the results of the tolerance judgment.
Format examples are indicated below:
Error judgement results
Comment
Within tolerance/outside compensation range
CHECK OK
Within tolerance/in compensation range
CHECK OK/WARNING
Outside tolerance range
CHECK LIMIT OVER ALARM
(6) Compensation tool No./compensation offset No.

Either the tool number designated by argument Ss or the offset number will
be printed.
Tool No. for tool No. 25: TOOL NO. 25
Offset No. for offset No. 25: OFFSET NO. 25
(7) Pre-compensation tool data/offset data
This function prints out the value of the data listed in (6) above before offset
compensation is made. If the data to be printed is tool data, it will all refer to
tool diameter with the exception of Z-axis step difference measurement, which
will be tool length.
For tool data:
For offset data:
TOOL DATA 20.000

OFFSET DATA 10.000
4-240
(8) Post-compensation tool data/offset data

This function prints the new data as listed in (6) above, after offset compensation has been made.
For tool data: NEW TOOL DATA 19.950
For offset data: NEW OFFSET DATA 9.975
- Items printed
{: Printout
: Not printout
Tolerance
indicated/
No.
Tolerance
indicated/
Not indicated
Item
Not indicated
Judgment
Compensation
mode
results outside
compensation
(1)
Workpiece No. and

workpiece count
(2)
Target value
(3)
Measured value
(4)
Tolerance range
(5)
Error and judgment
(6)
Compensation tool
number/offset number
(7)
Pre-compensation tool
data/offset data
(8)
Post-compensation tool
data/offset data
2. Measurement results and display on screen

Under normal circumstances measurement results are verified by the printout,
but they can also be verified at the PARAMETER COMMON VARIABLE
display if no printout command has been made.
This display can also be for measurements between two random points if the
purpose is to verify the measurement coordinates themselves and not the
distance between coordinates.
Address
Data contained at address
#135
Workpiece No.
#136
Workpiece count
#145
Target value
#146
Measured value
#147
Tolerance range ((uv)/2)
4-241
Address
Data contained at address
#152
Tolerance judgment OK range (q #147)
#153
Judgment results:
1. OK
2. WARNING
3.
4-18-8
Tolerance over ALARM
#162
X coordinate value of measurement point 1
#163
Y coordinate value of measurement point 1
#164
Z coordinate value of measurement point 1
#168
X coordinate value of measurement point 2
#169
Y coordinate value of measurement point 2
#170
Z coordinate value of measurement point 2
Alarm displays
An NC alarm will be generated in the event that a programming error or a
malfunction in the touch sensor prevents an accurate measurement from being
made or in case of tolerance over state. Macro user alarm No. 979 will be
displayed on the CRT screen if an alarm is generated.
Alarm message will be displayed in the OPERATOR MESSAGE item on the
maintenance display.
Alarm No./Message
901
Remarks
Data processing system parameter value is not correct.
PARAMETER ERROR
902
INITIALZ ARGUMENT ERROR
Argument data is not correct in workpiece measurment initial

setting program.
903
MEASURE ARGUMENT ERROR
Argument data is not correct in measurement operation program.
904
JUDGE ARGUMENT ERROR
Argument data is not correct in tolerance judgment printout

program.
905
Mismatch between tolerance judgment printout program and
PATTERN GROUP MISS MATCH
measurement pattern group
906
ARGUMENT E ERROR
The value of Ee in measurement B tolerance judgment does

not match the measurement pattern.
907
CORRECTION APPOINT ERR.
A compensation command has been made in measurement B

tolerance judgment program for an item for which compensation
is not possible.
910
TOLERANCE OVER
Results of tolerance judgment show a tolerance over state.
912
MMS NOT TOUCH
Tool does not touch the workpiece, when touch sensor

measurement operation.
4-242
4-18-9
Program and printout example

1. The following example illustrates tool diameter compensation made for Tool No.
20 as the result of ID measurement.
50.
50.
ID
z50. + 0.3
0
10.
M3S111
Program (EIA/ISO)
G65 P9100 W1234. R10. K3 Q0.5;

G65 P9110 M101. X-50. Y-50. Z-5. D50.;
G65 P9115 U0.3 V0. S20.;
Print out
%%
RESULT OF MEASURING
WNO 1234 COUNT 1
MARK DATA HOL/BOS DIA
50.150
MEASURED DATA R
50.064
TOLERANCE
0.150
CHECK OK/WARNING
0.036
TOOL NO
20
TOOL DATA
10.000
NEW TOOL DATA
9.914
END
The values q = 0.5; d = 50.; u = 0.3; and v = 0 would cause an alarm to be

generated if the measured value was greater than 50.3 or less than 50. If the result
were 50.075 <measured value<50.225, the result would be CHECK OK and no
compensation would be made.
4-243
2.
The following example illustrates compensation made for Offset No. 30 as

the result of a measurement made from hole center to surface.
100.
600.1
60.
P1
P2
z60.
10.
20.
M3S112
Program (EIA/ISO)
G65 P9100 W5678. R10. K4 Q0.5;

(P1) G65 P9122 M11. X-100. Y-60. Z-20. D60.;
(P2) G65 P9120 M122. X-40. Y-60. Z-20.;
G65 P9125 E1. U0.1 V-0.1 S30. B-1.;
Print out
%%
RESULT OF MEASURING
WNO 5678 COUNT 1
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
60.000
60.053
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
MARK DATA FACE-HOLE/BOS
TOLERANCE
0.100
CHECK OK/WARNING
0.053
MEASURED DATA X
OFFSET NO
30
OFFSET DATA
10.000
NEW OFFSET DATA
9.947
END
If the value B-1. were not designated, the offset data would become 10.053.
4-244
3. The following example illustrates a measurement made between two outside

corner points and a tolerance judgment made along the X-axis and the Y-axis.
800.1
P1
600.05
P2
15.
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaa
10.
10.
15.
M3S113
Program (EIA/ISO)
G65 P9100 W2468. R15. K5. Q0.5;

(P1) G65 P9123 M14. X-80. Y0. Z-10. I15.;
(P2) G65 P9123 M122 X0. Y-60. Z-10. I15.;
G65 P9125 E1. U0.1 V-0.1;
G65 P9125 E2. U0.05 V-0.05;
Print out
%%
RESULT OF MEASURING
WNO 2468 COUNT 1
MARK DATA CNR-CNR
80.000
MEASURED DATA X
80.047
TOLERANCE
0.100
CHECK OK
0.047
END
%%
MARK DATA CNR-CNR
60.000
MEASURED DATA Y
60.051
TOLERANCE
0.050
CHECK LIMIT OVER ALARM
0.051
END
The above example could also be applied to a step width measurement.
4-245
4. Continuous measuring of X-axis distance between hole center and groove

center, and Y-axis distance between hole center and plane.
120.
P2
720.05
48.
600.1
P2
P1
20.
15.
32.
z60.
M3S114
Program (EIA/ISO)
G65 P9100 W3690. R20. K3. Q0.5;

(P1) G65 P9122 M11. X-48. Y-60. Z-15. D60.;
(P2) G65 P9121 M21. X-120. Y-60. Z-15. D32.;
G65 P9125 E1. U0.05 V-0.05;
(P2) G65 P9120 M124. X-120. Y0.Z-15.;
G65 P9125 E2. U0.1 V-0.1;
Print out
%%
RESULT OF MEASURING
WNO 3690 COUNT 1
MARK DATA GRV/STP-HOL/BOS
72.000
MEASURED DATA X
71.963
0.050
TOLERANCE
0.037
a
a
a
aaa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aa
aa
aa
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaaa
a
CHECK OK/WARNING
END
%%
60.000
MEASURED DATA Y
59.952
TOLERANCE
0.100
CHECK OK
0.048
END
4-246
5. Measuring slant angle between two planes on X-Y plane

Tolerance: 0.2 deg.
420.
130.
200.
110.
270.
30
30
200.
10.
20.
M3S115
Program (EIA/ISO)
G65 P9100 W1496. R10. K5. Q0.5;

G65 P9130 F1. M3. X-420. Y-200. Z-20.;
G65 P9135 I200. A-30. U0.2 V-0.2;
G65 P9130 F1. M102. X-130. Y-270. Z-20;
G65 P9135 I110. A30. U0.2 V-0.2;
Print out
%%
RESULT OF MEASURING
WNO 1496 COUNT 1
MARK DATA SLANT X-Y
30.000
MEASURED DATA X
29.925
TOLERANCE
0.200
CHECK OK
0.075
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
aaaa
a
END
%%
MARK DATA SLANT X-Y
30.000
MEASURED DATA Y
29.925
TOLERANCE
CHECK OK
0.200
0.063
END
Argument K is not effective for this function. However, specify a positive value.
4-247
4-19
Commercial Printer Connect Function

The commercial printer connect function (option) allows the MAZATROL M-32 and
a commercial printer to be connected.
This section describes how to set the various parameters required for printer
operation with the MAZATROL M-32, as well as how to connect a printer. The
parameter data to be set differs according to the type of printer to be used.
Before using the connect feature, you should carefully read this section to use the
feature to its maximum.
4-19-1
Printers Yamazaki Mazak recommends

Yamazaki Mazak recommends that the following printers be used for the M-32:
Epson EX-800 or FX-800
Citizen LSP-120S
All these three types of printers require a serial I/F (interface).
4-19-2
Cabling
Connect an RS-232C I/F (interface) cable between the M-32 and the printer to be
used, as follows:
Serial
I/F
Connect the cable to

of the M-32.
Printer
RS-232C I/F cable
M3S116
4-248
The wiring of the RS-232C I/F cable differs according to the manufacturer of the
printer and the control method used for that printer. See below.
1. EX-800, FX-800
Printer
NC
1{
{1
2{
{2
3{
{3
4{
{5
5{
{7
7{
{6
6{
{ 20
20 {
2. LSP-120S (Data Busy Method)
4-19-3
Printer
NC
1{
{1
2{
{2
3{
{3
7{
{5
11 {
{7
6{
{6
20 {
{ 20
Specification of the printer

1. Interface
: RS-232C
2. Data transmission : Asynchronous
3. Baud rate (bps)
: 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200
(bits/sec)
4. Character length
: 8-bit
Stop bits
: 2-bit
Parity
5. Transfer method
: None
: RTS/CTS
4-249
4-19-4
Specification of the printer

Parameters G6 through G8, G10, and G13 through G18 are provided to
compensate for any differences in specifications according to the type of
commercial printer to be used.
The settings of these parameter to be used for the Epson or Citizen printers
Yamazaki Mazak recommends are listed below.
Address
G6
Description
Epson
10756
Graphic mode
G7
32770
G8
65535
G10
Printer baud rate
2:4800 bps (bits/sec)
G13
Setting type and character mode
2368
G14
Printing direction mode and forward line feed mode
G15
Line feed width for graphics
G17
320
15420
G16
13078
32304
65535
4095
13055
Line feed width for characters
G18
4-19-5
Citizen
65535
Explication of the setting parameter data

1. Setting parameters
Setting parameters is executed in decimal numbers. Taking the Epson printers
as an example, this section describes parameter data to be set from control
codes.
G6 G8
ASCII
ESC
n1
n2
Hexadecimal
1B
2A
04
80
02
G6
(
0010
1010
0000
*H
0100
*H: Hexadecimal
Decimal
10756
See the following part 3., List of codes, to check 2A, the
hexadecimal equivalent of the asterisk (*) in ASCII code.
G7
(
8
1000
0
0000
0
0000
2
0010
H
Decimal
32770
4-250
G8
(
F
1111
1111
1111
1111
H
Decimal
65535
Left-justify (F)H when it is not to be used.

G13
The following two setting types are provided, and one of them must be
specified using the appropriate bit:
Set-data type
Setting type
DC1 (on line) flag

Character mode
ASCII
ESC
HEX
1B
Set-data type
@
40
Type 0 or 1 is selected automatically, depending on the

input data setting method being used during character
output.
(Example of output)
0
Input data
Input data is printed in a form
Buff
rotated through 90 degrees in

a counterclockwise direction.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Printout
(0)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Input data is printed in a form

rotated through 90 degrees in
a clockwise direction and left-
Buff
right symmetrically.
a
aa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
aa
aa
aa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
M3S118
M3S117
(0)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
M3S119
(
0
0000
9
1001
4
0100
0000
Decimal
2368
Character mode setting

Set-data type yes/no (1/0)
DC1 (on line) flag yes/no (1/0)
4-251
G14
Example:
Printing direction mode
Forward line feed mode
ASCII
ESC
<
ASCII
ESC
<
HEX
1B
3C
HEX
1B
3C
0011
)H (
1100
0011
1100
Decimal
15420
Forward line feed mode setting

Printing direction mode setting
G15, G16
Example:
G15
ASCII
ESC
HEX
1B
33
16
3
0011
0011
0001
0110
Decimal
13078
G16
F
1111
1111
1111
1111
H
Decimal
65535
G17, G18
Example:
G17
ASCII
ESC
HEX
1B
0011
0010
2
32
1111
1111
H
Decimal
13055
G18
F
1111
1111
1111
1111
H
Decimal
65535
4-252
2. Control codes to be used

Epson
Citizen
ASCII
ASCII
Hexadecimal
Hexadecimal
Graphic mode
G6 G8
ESC
n1
n2
ESC
n1
n2
1B
2A
04
80
02
1B
2A
04
80
02
Character mode
G14
ESC
ESC
1B
40
1B
40
Printing direction mode

G13
ESC
<
ESC
<
1B
3C
1B
3C
Forward line feed mode
ESC
<
ESC
<
1B
3C
1B
3C
ESC
n(n/216)
ESC
n(n/144)
1B
33
16
1B
30
OF
ESC
ESC
1B
32
1B
32
G14
Line feed width (for graphics)
G15, G16
Line feed width (for characters)
G17, G18
7E
3. List of codes
0
SP
&
<
>
4-253
DEL
4. Device connection (NC side)
Input/
Output
1
FG (Frame Ground)
7
SG (Signal Ground)
2
Output
SD (Send Data)
3
Input
RD (Receive Data)
4
Output
RS (Request to Send)
5
Input
CS (Possible to Send)
6
Input
DR (Data Set Ready)

Minimize the DR-ER distance
when DR is not to be used.
20
Output
ER (NC Ready)
M3S120
Connector
Fixed terminal block
Maximum cable length
: DBM-25S (Japan Aviation Electronics Ind.) or equivalent

: D-20418-J2 (Japan Aviation Electronics Ind.) or
equivalent
: 15 m (590.55 in.)
Signal levels
Voltage
: +3 V or more when ON
3 V or less when OFF
4-254
5. Pin assignments
13
{
12
{
25
11
{
{
24
10
{
{
23
9
{
{
22
8
{
{
21
7
{
{
20
6
{
{
19
5
{
{
18
4
{
{
17
3
{
{
16
2
{
{
15
1
{
{
14
NC unit side connector: DBM-25S (Japan Aviation Electronics

Ind.) or equivalent
M3S121
6. Signal description
Pin
No.
Signal
Name
Signal Send direction

NC R I/O device
FG
Frame ground
SG
Signal ground
SD
Outgoing data from the NC
RD
Incoming data to the NC
RS
Description
Now sending data:

The ON status of this signal indicates that the NC is now sending
data.
CS
Possible to send data:

The ON status of this signal indicates that data can be sent from the
NC.
A data-sending temporary stop request to the NC is made by turning
this signal OFF.
DR
Data Set Ready:

When this signal is ON, the printer is regarded as ready for printing.
The signal must remain ON during printing. This signal is checked
when printer starts or during data sending from the printer, and if the
signal is OFF, the I/O device will be regarded as not yet ready for
operation.
20
ER
NC Ready:
This signal will turn ON when power is turned on and the I/O device
becomes operative. This signal remains ON until power has been
turned off.
4-255
SD (2) (Output)
4-256
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
7. Timing chart for RTS/CTS control method
ER (20) (Output)
DR (6) (Input)
CS (5) (Input)
1 to 3 characters
RS (4) (Output)
RD (3) (Input)
M3S122
- NOTE -
(4-257)
4-20
EIA COMMAND Display

Function:
- Call up the EIA COMMAND display to check further details of the operational
status of the machine during EIA/ISO program operation.
- Also, call up this display to select the program to be executed for automatic
operation, or to select execution conditions for automatic operation.
- In addition, this display can be used to check details of some specific modal data
and the contents of the active program.
Data of the EIA COMMAND display:
POSITION
WORK NO. 9999
( )
X 99999.999
Y
0.
BUFFER
X 99999.999
Y
0.
G
M
00
999 999 999 999
UNIT NO. 99999
( )
Z
B
A
Z
B
A
T
B
12345678
180
BLOCK NO. 99
( )
0.
0.
0.
NEXT COMMAND
0.
0.
0.
TOOL OFFSET
D#(123) 9999.999
H#(123) 9999.999
REMAIN
WPC (WK.PIE.COOR)
X 99999.999
Y
0.
X 99999.999
Y
0.
X 99999.999
Y
0.
Z
B
A
Z
B
A
Z
B
A
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
ACTIVE DATA
G#
1
17
20
40
0.
0.
0.
50
69
45.1
999
12345678
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
PKNO.
RPM(3) 100000
M/MIN
PALLET NO. 1
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
N300
S2300M3M8X12.939Y22.222F.01;
Z 999.999;
G23Z0;
TNO.
HEAD NO. 1
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
PROGRAM
N200 G0X100.001Y100.001Z100.001;
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
M#
54
97
MM/MIN
91
49
23
80
94
98
64
15
67
50.1
17.1
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
MACHINE
LOAD METER
SPINDL
0%
X-AXIS
Y-AXIS
Z-AXIS
0%
0%
0%
MM/REV
* * * COMMAND * * * EIA/ISO
M3S123
No.
Data name
POSITION X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
POSITION 4, 5
Degrees ( ) or mm
(inch)

MACHINE X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
MACHINE 4, 5
Degrees ( ) or mm
(inch)

Unit
Description
4-258
No.
Data name
Unit
Description
BUFFER X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
Moving distance of each axis in the next block to be executed
BURRER 4, 5
Degrees ( ) or mm
(inch)
Moving distance of an additional axis in the next block to be executed

REMAIN X, Y, Z
mm (inch)
The remaining distance of movement of each axis in the block

currently being executed
REMAIN 4, 5
WPC (WK.PIE.COOR.)
Degrees ( ) or mm
The remaining distance of movement of an additional axis in the block
(inch)
currently being executed

mm (inch)
Work zero-point position in the machine coordinate system
Degrees ( ) or mm
(inch)
Work zero-point position in the machine coordinate system

X, Y, Z
WPC (WK.PIE.COOR.)
4, 5
NEXT COMMAND
G, M, T, B
The G-, M-, T-, and B-codes preset in the next block to be executed
WORK NO.
( )
If a subprogram is currently being executed, the workpiece number of

that subprogram will be displayed in parentheses.
UNIT NO.
Number of the unit currently being executed.

If the unit currently being executed is a five-face unit or a face
definition unit, the number of the unit will be displayed in brackets.
BLOCK NO.
Sequence number currently being executed (for EIA/ISO programs,

however, the block number currently being executed)
If the sequence currently being executed is a five-face sequence or a
face definition sequence, the number of that sequence will be
displayed in brackets.
TOOL OFFSET D#
Tool diameter compensation value.

The tool diameter compensation number is displayed in parentheses.
TOOL OFFSET H#
Tool length compensation value.

The tool length compensation number is displayed in parentheses.
TNO.
Spindle tool number

A group number, if specified, is displayed instead.
PKNO.
Spindle tool number
PALLET NO.
Pallet number
HEAD NO.
Spindle head number (only for five-face machining specifications)
RPM
Revolutions per minute

The gear number is displayed in parentheses.
M/MIN
m/min (feet/min)
Circumferential speed of the spindle
MM/MIN
mm/min (inch/min)
Feed rate per minute
MM/REV
mm/rev (inch/rev)
Feed rate per revolution
LOAD METER
Load rates of the spindle, the X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis
PROGRAM
Program monitor
Four lines of program data from the block being executed are
displayed.
This display is not made for MAZATROL programs.
MODAL DATA G#
Currently valid G-code in all modal groups
MODAL DATA M#
Currently valid M-code
4-259
Display operations:
The EIA COMMAND display can be called up using the procedure described
below.
[1] Press and hold down the display selector key (green key located to the left of
the menu keys) until the following menu has been displayed:
EIA/ISO
MODAL
INFORM.
INFORM.
ALARM
PROCESS MEASURE MONITOR ARRANGE

CONTROL
EIA/ISO
HARD
COMMAND
COPY
[2]-1 Press the menu key EIA/ISO COMMAND.

- This calls up the EIA COMMAND display.
[2]-2 Press the menu key MONITOR.
- This displays the following menu:
POSITION COMMAND
TRACE
PROGRAM
MODAL
MONITOR
INFORM.
ALARM
EIA/ISO
COMMAND
Then press the menu key EIA/ISO COMMAND.

- This calls up the EIA COMMAND display.
It is possible to input workpiece coordinate values on this display.
The input procedures are the same as with the COMMAND display.
Description of the monitoring function
1. Display of the currently active block
Currently active block is displayed on the first line in reverse form.
During the operation it is displayed purple, and otherwise, blue in reverse form.
Example:
G00Z50.;
X 100. Y 100.;
Z0;
X0Y0;
If the block consists of multiple lines, only the first line will be displayed in
reverse form.
2. Display form and screen scrolling
A block for four lines is displayed according to the WK. PROGRAM (EIA/ISO)
display. During the period other than operating, the first four lines of the
program are displayed. During the operation, the currently active block is
displayed on the first line, and as the active block proceeds, the screen data is
scrolled. The following shows how the screen scrolling is carried out.
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
4-20-1
X 100. Y 100.;
G00Z50.;
Execution
X 100. Y 100.;
Z0;
X0Y0;
Z0;
G00G90G54;
X0Y0;
4-260
3. Subprogram display
During use of subprogram call from the main program, program monitor display
will change over to subprogram display when execution control is transferred to
that subprogram.
Likewise, subprogram display will change over to main program display when
execution control is transferred from the subprogram back to the main program.
Subprogram
Main program
O200;
M98P200;
Calling subprogram
X100.;
4-20-2
G00G90;
Y100.;
X0;
Z0;
Y0;
Notes
1. Program monitor display is not made during selection of MAZATROL programs.
If an EIA/ISO program is called up from a MAZATROL program, only the
EIA/ISO subprogram data will be displayed.
2. The contents of the menu displayed, after this display has been selected, are
the same as those of the menus presented on the COMMAND display,
irrespective of the type of operation mode (manual, automatic, or MDI).
3. Program monitor display is made only during memory operation.
4. When a macrostatement is displayed on the program monitor display, only if
the line immediately succeeding the macrostatement is the first line, then the
head space will be deleted and the rest will be displayed in left-justfied form.
5. In case of block skipping, if the block immediately succeeding that which has
been skipped is currently active, then the skipped block remains on the first
line in the program monitor display.
Example:
Setting block skip 1:
/1 X10.; . . . . .
Y10.; . . . . .
Z10.;
M02.;
Skipped block
Active block
4-261
4-21
MAZATROL Program DC Input/Output (Option)
4-21-1
Function overview
The MAZATROL program DC input/output function allows not only the
conventional DNC interface and CMT interface, but also a PTP/PTR interface
(paper tape I/O interface), to be used to transfer MAZATROL programs using
the data I/O function of the M-32.
NC equipment
MAZATROL M-32
Paper tape reader/puncher
MAZATROL program
P
T
RS232C
P
/
P
T
R
M3S124
4-21-2
Transfer condition
The conditions for MAZATROL DC input/output with tape I/O are listed below.
1. A special interface for a paper tape reader/puncher must be used to transfer
MAZATROL programs.
2. Program data must be transferred under DC control or RTS/CTS control, via an
RS-232C cable.
3. Of all the functions provided by the TAPE I/O display, those listed below can
be used to operate a MAZATROL program.
- LOAD
- ALL LOAD
- PUNCH
- ALL PUNCH
- COMPARE
- ALL COMPARE
- TAPE SEARCH
- REWIND
4-262
4. To transfer MAZATROL program data, the required end-of-program characters

must be appended beforehand since, unlike EIA/ISO programs, original
MAZATROL programs do not include a code, such as M30 or M99, that
denotes the end of the program.
The end of a MAZATROL program is identified by the ASCII code characters
that have been specified in parameters G51, G52, and G53.
G51 . . . .
45H (E)
G52 . . . .
4EH (N)
G53 . . . .
44H (D)
In the example shown above, the list of the characters END denotes the end of
the program.
4-21-3
Operating procedures
How to carry out MAZATROL DC control operation is the same as for the
conventional data IN/OUT function (tape I/O function). Refer to section 4-9-3 DATA
IN/OUT (TAPE) display.
Example :
PUNCH operation
[1] Set paper tape onto the tape puncher, and call up the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE)
display.
[3] Using the numeric key(s), specify the workpiece number of the
MAZATROL program to be output. Then, press the input key
operated.
whose contents are currently being punched.
- After punching of specified programs, the reverse-display status of START
will be released.
4-21-4
Description of parameters
Address
G51 to G53
Description
- The end-of-program codes to be used with MAZATROL program
DC input/output
- Set these codes in ASCII form.
4-263
4-21-5
Notes
1. Do not alter the end-of-program codes that have once been set. The NC
equipment will not be able to identify the end of the MAZATROL program, if,
after punching of the program data with the PTP/PTR function, the end-ofprogram codes set previously in parameter G51, G52, and G53 are altered and
the data-loading operation is carried out.
2. When MAZATROL DC input/output is not valid, the alarm 439 MAZATROL
PROGRAM DESIGNATED will occur if an attempt is made to set the
workpiece number of a MAZATROL program on the TAPE I/O display.
3. When MAZATROL DC input/output is not valid, the alarm 555 MAZATROL
PROGRAM DESIGNATED will occur if an attempt is made to load the data of
a MAZATROL program following completion of selection of ALL LOAD on the
TAPE I/O display.
4. The alarm 513 PROG. SOFTWARE NOT COINCIDENT will occur if an
attempt is made to load program other than those for M-32.
5. If the specified end-of-program codes mismatch to the required ones, the alarm
558 PROGRAM END NOT FOUND will occur when EOR is detected.
ASCII codes list:

Code
(hexadecimal digit)
Character
Code
(hexadecimal digit)
Character
Code
(hexadecimal digit)
Character
Code
(hexadecimal digit)
Character
30
41
4B
55
31
42
4C
56
32
43
4D
57
33
44
4E
58
34
45
4F
59
35
46
50
5A
36
47
51
37
48
52
38
49
53
39
4A
54
4-264
4-22
Program Management Functions

When an EIA/ISO program or MAZATROL program is transferred using M-32 tape
I/O function, the name of the program which is to be set on the PROGRAM FILE
display can be assigned to that program before starting the transfer operation.
imitations on the usable workpiece number of programs are provided, and for some
specific program numbers, erasure and editing of programs and their call-out on the
WK. PROGRAM display are prohibited.
The following three functions are available:
- Prohibition of selected-program editing
- Prohibition of selected-program call
- Selected-program erasure
4-22-1
Prohibition of selected-program editing

Irrespective of the valid or invalid status of the write protect key, execution of the
operations listed in the table below is disabled for the selected program.
The alarm 406 MEMORY PROTECT will occur if an attempt is made to carry out
these operations.
Type of display
4-22-2
Prohibited item
WK. PROGRAM display

(MAZATROL, EIA/ISO)
- Modifying the selected program
PROGRAM FILE display
Erasing the selected program

Registering the selected program
Renumbering the selected program
Execution of ALL ERASE erases all programs, except the
selected ones.
Prohibition of selected-program call

Display of the contents of the selected program is prohibited.
The alarm 402 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will occur if an attempt is made to
carry out for the selected program the operations listed in the table below.
Type of display
Prohibited item
WK. PROGRAM display

(MAZATROL, EIA/ISO)
- Searching for the workpiece number of the selected

program
- Copying from the selected program (unit copying and
shape copying included)
- Renumbering the selected program
PROGRAM MONITOR
display
- Displaying the selected program for monitoring purposes

(No alarms will result even if an attempt is made to call up
the selected program.)
EIA COMMAND display
- Displaying the selected program for monitoring purposes

(No alarms will result even if an attempt is made to call up
the selected program.)
4-265
Type of display
Prohibited item
DATA IN/OUT display

(CMT, DNC, PTP/PTR)
4-22-3
- Saving or punching the selected program

- If ALL PUNCH is executed using PTP/PTR, the selected
program will not be punched.
- The alarm 517 (or 547 or 587) PROG. OPERATION NOT
ALLOWED will occur if an attempt is made to execute a
saving or punching operation under a previously set status
of the workpiece number of the selected program.
- Loading of the selected program is possible.
Selected-program erasure
All-program erasure, which was possible with the conventional all-program erasure
function, has become impossible, except in the cases listed below, because of
addition of the new function described previously in section 4-22-1 above. Only
programs other than the selected ones are erased by all-program erasure.
The cases, where batch erasure of all programs (including the selected one) is
possible, are as follows:
- When installing the system
- If the program within the NC equipment have been destroyed
In those cases, batch erasure of all programs becomes possible by setting 1 in
parameter F82.
Display operation:
[1] When the PROGRAM FILE display is called up on the screen, the following
menu will be displayed in the menu display area:
RENUMBER
PROGRAM
ALL
ERASE
ERASE
PROGRAM PREVIOUS
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE
[2] Press the menu key ALL ERASE, then key in 9999 using the numeric keys,
and press the input key
Whether all programs are to be erased at any one time or only the programs within
the selected program number range are to be erased, can be specified by setting
data in parameter F82 as follows :
F82= 0: The programs within the selected range erased
= 1: All programs erased
4-266
4-22-4
Address
H91
Descriptions
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Program management function

Prohibition of editing
(Programs of the order of #9000)
Prohibition of call
(Programs of the order of #9000)
Prohibition of editing
(Programs of the orders of #8000/#9000)
Prohibition of call
(Programs of the orders of #8000/#9000)
F82
Total erasing of programs

0: The programs other than the selected ones erased
1: All programs erased
4-23
Program-Name Tape Input/Output
4-23-1
Function overview
When an EIA/ISO program or MAZATROL program is transferred using M-32 tape
I/O function, the name of the program which is to be set on the PROGRAM FILE
display can be assigned to that program before starting the transfer operation.
4-23-2
Transfer conditions
The following lists conditions for input or output of a program name using the tape
I/O functions:
1. Input or output of program names is possible only if the program-name tape I/O
function has been made valid using parameter G46.
2. Of all the functions presented on the TAPE I/O display, only those listed below
can be used to transfer program names to or from a tape.
- LOAD
- ALL LOAD
- PUNCH
- ALL PUNCH
- COMPARE
- ALL COMPARE
4-267
4-23-3
Operating procedures
The operating procedures to be used on the TAPE I/O display are the same as
those which are to be carried out on the conventional DATA IN/OUT (TAPE)
function. Refer to section 4-9-3 DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display of the operating
manual.
Example:
PUNCH operation
[1] Set a paper tape in the tape puncher, and call up the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE)
display.
[3] Specify the work number of the program to be transferred, and press the
input key .
- The entered work number will then be displayed and the cursor will move to
the parentheses located to the immediate right of that data item.
- This highlights the START menu and operates the tape puncher.
- The cursor blinks at the workpiece number of the program being punched.
- The highlighted status of the START menu will be cleared when punching of
that program completes.
4-23-4
Tape format
The name of the program transferred to or from a tape must be designated as
follows:
1. For an EIA/ISO program
Set the control-out code ( after the five-digit number beginning with O, then
set the program name and the control-in code ), in that order.
Example:
O1234(COMMENT1234);
Program name
4-268
2. For a MAZATROL program

Set the control-out code ( after the five-digit number beginning with O, and
then set the program ID code, a colon :, the program name, and the controlin code ), in that order.
Example:
O1234(MAZ-211:COMMENT1234);
Program ID code
Program name
Note:
The program ID code identifies the M-32 MAZATROL program that will be
transferred to or from a tape.
MAZ-211 ..... M-32 MAZATROL program
4-23-5
4-23-6
Address
Description
G46
This parameter determines whether the program-name tape I/O function is to

be made valid or invalid.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Notes
1. Only the codes listed in the following ASCII codes list can be used as program
names.
If a code not listed in the following ASCII codes list is loaded, the code will be
converted into a null code (20H) and then stored into the internal memory of
the NC unit.
2. The maximum number of name characters which can be stored into the NC
internal memory during one program-name loading operation is 11.
If,
therefore, the name to be loaded consists of 12 characters or more, all those
excess characters will be ignored.
4-269
ASCII codes list:

Code
(hexadecimal digit)
Character
Code
(hexadecimal digit)
Character
Code
(hexadecimal digit)
Character
Code
(hexadecimal digit)
Character
30
41
4B
55
31
42
4C
56
32
43
4D
57
33
44
4E
58
34
45
4F
59
35
46
50
5A
36
47
51
37
48
52
20
SP
38
49
53
2D
39
4A
54
2E
4-270E
5.
PRINTOUT
This operation should be carried out to hardcopy the display data being indicated
on the CRT screen.
[1] Connect the printer cable to the PTP/PTR connector of the NC equipment.
[2] Call the display to be hardcopied.
[3] Press twice the display selector key (green key located to the left of the menu
keys).
- The following menu will then be displayed in the menu display area.
EIA/ISO
MODAL
INFORM.
INFORM.
ALARM
PROCESS
HARD
CONTROL
COPY
[4] Press the menu key HARD COPY.

- This will cause the display status of HARD COPY to reverse and the printer
to operate.
- The reverse-display status of HARD COPY will be released when printing of
the display data being displayed is completed.
Notes:
1. The printer stops operating if the following procedure is carried out during
printing.
(1) Press the cursor key
, or
to move the cursor.
(2) Change the display over to another display.

(3) Press the menu key I/O STOP.
2. In the above-mentioned printout operations using HARD COPY, only one
display of a machining program can be hardcopied at a time. When printing out
a machining program prestored within the memory of the NC equipment, the
machining program can be printed out from the first line through the final line
using the menu key PRINT of the WK. PROGRAM display. For details of the
operating procedure, refer to the separate Programming manual (Application).
5-1
- NOTE -
(5-2E)
6.
DATA WRITE INHIBIT CONDITIONS

When the program override switch is set to the LOCK (Inhibit) position as illustrated
below, it becomes impossible to override data, except for its specific portions.
The table below represents distinction in type between data that can be overridden
(write enable) and data that cannot be overridden (write disable).
Reprogramming switch
OK: Write enable

NOT OK: Write disable
Data name
POSITION display
COMMAND display
Unit
Description
Position
OK
Counter
OK
Cutting time
NOT OK
POSITION display
COMMAND display
WORK NO.
OK
TRACE display
GEAR NO.
OK
TRACE display
SCALE
OK
PATH CHECK display

SHAPE CHECK display
PLANE SELECT
OK
Shape
OK
PASS CONTINUE/STEP
OK
PARAMETER display
CUTTING COND
NOT OK
Other parameters
NOT OK

WK. PROGRAM display
NOT OK
Program creation
NOT OK
Edition
NOT OK
Data search (Unit, tool, etc.)
OK
Work No. search
OK
DATA IN/OUT display

MACRO VARIABLE display
OK
COMMON VARIABLE
6-1
NOT OK
Data name
TOOL FILE display
TOOL DATA display
TOOL LAYOUT display
Unit
Description
NOM-z/Suffix
NOT OK
MAT
NOT OK
DEPTH
NOT OK
Number of teeth
NOT OK
Minimum diameter
NOT OK
Angle
NOT OK
ALL ERASE
NOT OK
TOOL
OK
NOM-z/Suffix
OK
ACT-z
OK
LENGTH
OK
COMP.
OK
AUXIL.
OK
THR/HP. (Option)
OK
LIFE
OK
TIME
OK
TEACH
OK
T-DATA MOVE
OK
TOOL SEARCH
OK
DRUM NO.
OK
WORK NO.
OK
DRUM NO.
OK
SPARE T ERASE
OK
PKNO. CLEAR
OK
PKNO. SHIFT
OK
PKNO. ASSIGN
OK
SPARE T ADDITION
OK
LAYOUT FINISH
OK
TOOL SEARCH
OK
LAYOUT CANCEL
OK
TOOL ERASE
OK
TOOL OFFSET display
OK
WORK OFFSET display
OK
Note:
With the program override switch left set to the LOCK position, if an attempt is
made to write (or override) data indicated as NOT OK shown above, then the alarm
message 406 MEMORY PROTECT (write disabled) will be displayed.
6-2E
INDEX
Page
A
Added fundamental coordinates function (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADDITIONAL WPC display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-173
4-173
Address setting in the fundamental coordinates unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALL COMPARE (NC = TAPE)
...............................
ALL LOAD (TAPE NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-174
2-1
4-138
2-2
4-108
ALL PUNCH (NC TAPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All-axis zero-point return button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASCII codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATC menu key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATC (automatic tool change) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axis-movement buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-107
1-13
4-253
1-14
1-9
1-14
1-13
B
...................................
1-8
Brightness adjustment dial
C
Change of scale values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-106
4-11
Circle measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMMAND display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commercial printer connect function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMMON VARIABLE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-178
1-9
4-5
4-248
4-122
4-122
COMPARE (NC = CMT)

...................................
COMPARE (NC = TAPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compensation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant menu key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coordinates write facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corner R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURRENT display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-94
4-107
4-202
1-14
4-195
4-46
4-72
Cursor keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cutting feed key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cutting feed override keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9
2-1
1-12
1-11
IND-1
D
Data
Erasing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data specification area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data write inhibit conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to abort data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2E
2-1
2-1
6-1
4-95
Modifying data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data cancellation key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA IN/OUT display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2E
3-1
1-9
4-87
4-89
4-98
DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data management system parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC input/output function (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designation by means of the group number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIRECTORY (CMT NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-102
4-207
4-262
4-128
Display
Display erasure key
.....................................
4-95
1-8
Display selector key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display title area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name of components of each display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print out of displayed data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door interlock switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-16
2-1
2-1
5-1
1-15
E
Eccentricity compensation values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIA COMMAND display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIA program monitoring functions (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIA/ISO INFOR display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Endmill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-208
4-258
4-166
4-112
1-15
4-35
External multi-piece machining function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

External unit skipping function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-154
4-152
F
Feed hold button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First zero-point return indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
1-13
First zero-point return key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Five-surface machining option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Five-surface measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-12
4-191
4-192
IND-2
G
Groove center and step center measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Groove width and step width measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H
Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head-of-program indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hole center and boss center measurement
.......................
I
Inner diameter and outer diameter measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input procedure for parts count values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input procedure for time data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J
JIG OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jig offsetting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-222
4-218
5-1
1-17
4-222
4-216
1-9
4-4
4-8
4-157
4-157
L
LOAD (CMT NC)
.......................................
LOAD (HOST NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOAD (TAPE NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCAL VARIABLE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-91
4-99
4-105
4-122
4-122
M
Machine failure clear key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine failure indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machining management data writing macro-program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machining management functions (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machining shapes displayed continuously (PLANE CHECK display) . . . . . .
Machining shapes displayed continuously (SHAPE CHECK display) . . . . .
1-14
1-17
4-160
4-143
4-33
4-26
Machining shapes displayed intermittently (PLANE CHECK display) . . . . .

Machining shapes displayed intermittently (SHAPE CHECK display) . . . . .
Machining shapes displayed on a program unit basis
(SHAPE CHECK display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Macro program (Workpiece measurement printout option) . . . . . . . . . . . .
MACRO VARIABLE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-27
4-210
4-122
Macro variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance display key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a macro-program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual measurement of tool length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual mode (On-machine measurement option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-122
2-3
1-14
4-161
4-49
4-188
IND-3
4-33
4-27
Manual pulse feed key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual pulse handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDI mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDI run key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASURE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement
Measurement compensation values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-206
Measurement funciton (workpiece measurement printout option) . . . . .

Measurement pattern (On-machine measurement option) . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring procedure (On-machine measurement option) . . . . . . . . . .
Output of measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEMORY mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory run key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-197
4-176
4-182
4-237
4-188
1-14
Menu display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menu keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu selector key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODAL INFO. display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode (On-machine measurement option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
1-16
1-16
2-1
2-1
4-136
4-188
Monitoring function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MULTIPLE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-12
1-15
4-188
1-14
4-179
4-166/257
4-148
4-154
N
NC alarm status indicator lamp
...............................
1-17
NEXT display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeric keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-72
1-9
O
On-machine measurement (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-176
1-2
2-4
OT clear key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside and inside corner measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
4-227
1-6
P
PALLET MANAGEMENT display (option)
4-143
........................
Pallet menu key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PARAMETER display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter
Parameter registration (Workpiece measurement printout option) . . . . .
Parameters (Machining management function option) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type of PARAMETER subdisplays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IND-4
1-14
4-85
4-206
4-160
4-86
PATH CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PLANE CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plane select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pocket number
Automatic pocket-number assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing pocket-numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interchanging pocket numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
4-31
4-11
Manual pocket-number assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pocket-number shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting PKNO data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POSITION display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power ON button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-77
4-74
4-59
4-2
1-8
1-8
4-75
4-80
4-53
PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printout function (Workpiece measurement printout option)
...........
PROCESS WORK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor busy status indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process-number search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program
Erasing a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-142
4-203
4-140
1-17
4-140
Erasing all the registered programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Registering program names (COMMENT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROGRAM FILE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program management function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROGRAM MONITOR display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program-name tape input/output function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23
4-24
4-20
4-265
4-166
4-267
4-22
Prohibition of selected-program editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-265
Prohibition of slelected-program call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-265
Program start position designation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-166/170
Pulse-feed axis selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
PUNCH (NC TAPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-106
R
Rapid feed key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rapid feedreate decrease key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rapid feedrate indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registered tool
Erasing all sets of registered tool data (TOOL LIFE INDEX display) . . .
Erasing the tool data on a tool basis (TOOL LIFE INDEX display) . . . .
4-136
4-135
Partial erasure of registered tool data (TOOL LAYOUT display) . . . . . .

Selection in order of tool registration number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total erasure of registered tool data (TOOL LAYOUT display) . . . . . . .
Registering milling tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering the tools to be used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reprogramming switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-82
4-128
4-83
4-36
4-51
1-15
IND-5
1-12
1-12
1-12
Reset key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re-setting the current position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Returning speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REWIND (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
4-117
4-171
4-47
4-111
S
SAVE (NC CMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE (NC HOST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled-operation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Second zero-point return indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Second zero-point return key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-93
4-101
4-144
1-13
1-13
4-29
Selected-program erasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection in order of length of life
.............................
Setting menu data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting numeric data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the tool data INVALIDATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting tool data valid or invalid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHAPE CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-266
4-128
3-1
3-1
4-67
4-68
4-26
Slant measurement and tolerance judgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Spare tool
Erasing spare tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying a spare tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spindle job button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spindle locked status indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-231
Spindle-rotational direciton change button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Spindle speed override key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spindle start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spindle stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop-of-program indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10
1-10
1-9
1-9
1-15
1-17
4-190
Straightness measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subsidiary display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surface measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surface measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-181
2-3
4-179
4-220
4-82
4-81
1-9
1-17
T
TAPE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape run key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TAPE SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool
To display a subsidiary display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designation by means of the tool number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IND-6
4-188
1-14
4-110
2-4
4-128
Setting tool-compensation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting tool group numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting tool-life control data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool-compensation data setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool interference data assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool unclamped status indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tolerance judgment function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-129
4-127
4-132
4-115
4-77
1-17
4-200
Tolerance judgment printout A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tolerance judgment printout B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tolerance judgment printout C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOL DATA display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool data GROUP NO. ASSIGNMENT (option)
..................
Tool data INVALIDATION (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-220
4-228
4-231
4-42
4-60
4-67
TOOL FILE (ENDMILL) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TOOL LAYOUT display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOL LIFE INDEX display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOL OFFSET DATA display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE A) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE B) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-34
4-72
4-126
4-72
4-113
4-113
4-114
Tool-data input procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Touch sensor tool compensation amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch-sensor indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TPS key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-44
4-206
1-18E
1-8
4-8
U
UNIT SKIP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-152
V
Variables registering procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VFC key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-124
1-8
W
WK. PROGRAM display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WORK OFFSET DATA display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Workpiece
Changing a workpiece number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input procedure for workpiece coordinate values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
4-120
Setting workpiece zero-point coordinate values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Workpiece measurement initial setting (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Workpiece measurement printout system (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-121
4-214
4-198
IND-7
4-14
4-118
X
X-axis
Setting X-coordinate values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-axis surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-120
4-180
Y
Y-axis
Setting Y-coordinate values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Y-axis surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Z
Z-axis
Setting Z-coordinate values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Z-axis surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IND-8E
4-121
4-180
4-121
4-180

M32 Operating Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

M32 Operating Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

OPERATING MANUAL

MANUAL No.: H731SA0576E

the machine can exert its performance safely.

description, or omission, contact us, please.

If the manual number is not identified, inform us of the following:

1. Name of the machine 2. Number of the machine 3. Name of the manual

Return to Main Menu

Operating manual for machine

7. Alarm list M-32

Operating manual for MAZATROL CAM32-A system

11. Operating manual for Geometry compensation function

(3) If the memory card containing the machining programs is replaced

Layout of Keys, Pushbuttons, Switches, and Indicator Lamps on

DISPLAY DATA AND SCREEN OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PROCEDURES FOR DATA INPUT, CANCELLATION,

DESCRIPTION OF EACH DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SHAPE CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tool data INVALIDATION (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DATA IN/OUT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MACRO VARIABLE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Machining Management Functions (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Machining management data writing macro-program . . . . . . . . 4-160

On-machine Measurement (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mode and menu changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Workpiece Measurement Printout System (Option) . . . . . . . . .

Output of measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specification of the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prohibition of selected-program editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DATA WRITE INHIBIT CONDITIONS

5. Functions and usage of other menu data

TOOL NAME T-DATA

is currently being displayed in

keys, in that order.

keys in this order.

- The results of the addition (or subtraction) will then be displayed.

- By pressing the menu key , it becomes possible to change the above

BACK SPOT REAMER

BORING BACK BOR.

keys in this order in procedural step [3].

is pressed following this, the NC equipment will check

in procedural step [3]

without specifying the nominal diameter.

[1] Press and hold down the key

until the cursor has moved to the

tool data you want to erase.

Move the cursor to this position.

[2] Press the menu key EDIT.

[3] Press the menu key TOOL ERASE.

[4] Press the input key

- Data in the cursor position will be erased.

[2] Press the menu key EDIT.

[3] Press the menu key TOOL NAME ORDER.

- The tool data will be rearranged in order of tool name.

order) BK FACE B-B BAR CHF-M F-MILL E-MILL

TOOL NAME ORDER +

[1] Using the key

, move the cursor to a position under PKNO. item

where you want to set data.

- The pocket number will be set in PKNO. item.

Move the cursor to this position.

To set 3 in the PKNO. item, press the

keys, in that order.

Tool dataGROUP NO. ASSIGNMENT (Option)

Screen display (TOOL DATA display)